This is the multi-page printable view of this section. Click here to print.

Return to the regular view of this page.

Networking

We provide a stable and user‑friendly network operating environment optimized for customers’ diverse cloud environments.

1 - VPC

1.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Samsung Cloud Platform provides VPC services to enable the use of logically isolated, customer‑dedicated private network spaces in the cloud environment.
VPC(Virtual Private Cloud) is a service that provides a logically isolated, customer‑dedicated private network space in a cloud environment. Depending on the intended use, you can create a General Subnet or a Local Subnet for communication between servers, and freely select NAT Gateway and Internet Gateway to configure various networks. You can create multiple VPCs and operate them independently. VPC Peering allows configuration of connections between VPCs.

Service architecture diagram

Diagram
Figure. VPC architecture diagram

Components

Subnet

Subnet refers to the IP address range of a VPC. Depending on the purpose, use the General Subnet to create subnets for public or private use. It is a service that lets users segment the network within a VPC according to their purpose and scale. Subnet provides a standard Subnet and a Local Subnet for communication between servers.

  • General Subnet Creation/Read/Deletion: When creating a VPC, a Subnet is created by default, and you use the Subnet according to its purpose. * For example, you can separate and use a Public Subnet that can access the internet and a Private Subnet that cannot.

  • VPC Endpoint Subnet Create/Read/Delete: You can access the Samsung Cloud Platform via a private connection from an external network linked to the VPC, allowing entry into the VPC.

  • Local Subnet Creation/Query/Deletion: It does not allow connections to other Subnets or external access, and only permits direct connections between Virtual Server-Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server-Bare Metal Server, so it can be configured only for Virtual Server-Virtual Server within the VPC.

Subnet types

A network zone that logically partitions the VPC IP range, segmenting traffic and security through routing and public/private separation. The provided Subnet types are as follows.

typeDetailed description
Public SubnetSubnet that can perform internet inbound/outbound communication via Public IP NAT and NAT Gateway
Private SubnetSubnet that can perform outbound Internet communication through a NAT Gateway
VPC Endpoint SubnetSubnet for VPC Endpoint creation
Local SubnetA subnet that does not permit external communication, used only for inter‑server communication.
Table. Subnet type

Internet Gateway

You can create an Internet Gateway, connect it to a VPC, view its details, or delete an Internet Gateway that is not in use. You can connect VPC resources to the internet using an Internet Gateway.
You can assign a Public IP to instances and load balancers that are internet‑connected so they can be accessed from outside.

NAT Gateway

You can create a NAT Gateway, connect it to a subnet, view its details, or delete a NAT Gateway that is not in use.
To create a NAT Gateway for a subnet, you must first create an Internet Gateway and attach it to the VPC. When you create a NAT Gateway, internet access is allowed for all resources belonging to the subnet. Apply firewall rules to restrict internet access.
A NAT Gateway can be created when it is of the General type, and it is a service that maps a single representative public IP for a Virtual Server without a public IP NAT to use the internet for outbound traffic.

Public IP

If you want to use the same IP address each time you stop and start an instance, reserve a Public IP and use it.
This is a service that creates a desired public IP within the available Public IP pool of Samsung Cloud Platform and assigns it to compute resources for use.
Compute resources assigned with the designated public IP retain the IP even after a reboot.

Port

Provides a connection point for connecting a single device, such as a server’s NIC, to the network. This allows adding NICs beyond the default provision.

VPC Endpoint

Provides an entry point for the VPC that allows access to the Samsung Cloud Platform via a private connection from an external network connected to the VPC.

VPC Peering

You can communicate via IP through a 1:1 private route between VPCs. By default, it provides peering between VPCs in the same account, and only one connection is allowed between different accounts.

Private NAT

You can map the customer’s IP and connect using Direct Connect from compute resources within the VPC.

Transit Gateway

Transit Gateway is a gateway service that easily connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform network and serves as a connection hub for multiple VPCs within the cloud environment.
Through the Transit Gateway, you can configure various network topologies that customers desire. Additionally, it provides independent firewall configuration and routing capabilities for each connected network segment, enabling thorough security management.

It is a service that connects internal Samsung Cloud Platform data to a private path between the VPC and the SCP service without exposing it to the internet.

  • PrivateLink Service is for service providers, and PrivateLink Endpoint is for service users.

Constraints

The VPC of Samsung Cloud Platform limits the number of VPCs and Subnets that can be created as follows.

CategoryDefault quotaDetailed description
VPC5Default VPC creation limit per account
VPC IP range6Number of IP range creation limits per VPC (default 1 + additional 5)
VPC Peering5Maximum number of VPC Peerings per account
Primary Subnet3Maximum number of default Primary Subnets that can be created per VPC
Secondary Subnet10Maximum number of default Secondary Subnets that can be created per Primary Subnet
  • When it is a Local Subnet, a default of 50 is provided
Private NAT3Default Private NAT creation limit per VPC
Transit Gateway3Maximum number of Transit Gateways per account
Transit Gateway connection from VPC5Maximum number of VPC connections per Transit Gateway (only the same Account can be connected)
Table. VPC constraints

Preceding Service

VPC has no prerequisite services.

1.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics

VPC - Internet Gateway sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.

Reference
For how to view metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Metrics

Internet Gateway

The following are the basic metrics for the Internet Gateway namespace.

The indicators whose names are shown in bold below are the indicators selected as major indicators among the basic indicators provided by Internet Gateway. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built for each service in ServiceWatch.

Each metric provides guidance in the user guide on which statistical value is meaningful to query, and among the meaningful statistics, the values displayed in bold text are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, primary metrics can be viewed using the primary statistical values.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunitMeaningful statistics
Network In Total Bytes_InternetCumulative traffic volume from Internet Gateway → VPCBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out Total Bytes _InternetCumulative traffic volume heading from VPC → Internet GatewayBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In Total Bytes _Internet_DeltaCumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from Internet Gateway → VPC (Internet)Bytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
Network Out Total Bytes _Internet_DeltaCumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from VPC → Internet Gateway (Internet)Bytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Table. VPC - Internet Gateway Basic Metrics

1.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required VPC information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create VPC

You can create and use VPC services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a VPC, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC button. 2. Navigate to the VPC creation page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      구분
      필수 여부
      Detailed description
      VPC nameRequiredName of the VPC to create
      • Enter using English letters and numbers, within 3 to 20 characters
      IP rangeRequiredSelect IP range
      • in IP range format /16 - /28 enter within the range
        • Example: 192.168.0.0/24
      • Some IP ranges are reserved for management and cannot be used
      DescriptionSelectionEnter description of VPC
      Table. VPC Service Information Input Items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      whether required
      Detailed description
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, input or select Key, Value values
      Table. VPC additional information input items
  3. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the VPC List page.

View VPC details

The VPC service can view and edit the complete resource list and detailed information. VPC Details page consists of Detailed Information, IP Range Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view VPC details, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the VPC menu. 2. Navigate to the VPC List page.
  3. On the VPC List page, click the resource whose details you want to view. 3. Navigate to the VPC Details page.
    • The VPC Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is organized into the Details, IP Range Management, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusVPC status
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Deleting: Deletion in progress
      • Creating: Creation in progress
      • Error: Unable to determine current status
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Service cancellationCancel service button
      • If you cancel the service, the running service may be terminated immediately, so proceed with the cancellation only after fully considering the impact of service interruption
      Table. VPC status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the VPC List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • VPC In VPC, it means the VPC SRN
Resource NameVPC name
Resource IDVPC’s unique resource ID
ConstructorUser who created the VPC
Creation Date/TimeVPC creation timestamp
ModifierUser who modified VPC information
Modification date and timeDate and time the VPC information was modified
VPC nameVPC resource name
Availability ZoneVPC Availability Zone information
External connectionExternal resource information
VPC IDVPC unique ID
IP rangeVPC IP range
ExplanationVPC description
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit the description
Table. VPC detailed information tab items

IP range management

VPC List page allows you to view and add IP range information associated with the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
IP rangeAdded IP range information
Creation Date/TimeIP range addition time
Add IP rangeAdd IP range button
  • Enter within the range 0.0.0.0/16 - 0.0.0.0/28
  • Example: 192.168.0.0/16
Table. VPC IP range management tab items
Reference

When adding an IP range to a VPC, you cannot add it in the following cases.

  • IP range currently used in the VPC
  • The address range added as the destination to the peer VPC in the VPC Peering rule associated with the current VPC.
  • The address range added as a remote destination in the Direct Connect rule connected to the current VPC.
  • The range where the destination was added as remote in the Transit Gateway rule connected to the current VPC.
  • NAT IP range currently used by the Private NAT connected to the VPC

Tag

On the VPC List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • A maximum of 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, you can search and select from the existing list of created Keys and Values
Table. VPC Tag tab items

작업 이력 {#job}

VPC 목록 페이지에서 선택한 자원의 작업 이력을 확인할 수 있습니다.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource change history
  • Check operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information
Table. VPC task history tab detailed information items

VPC 해지하기 {#terminate}

사용하지 않는 VPC를 해지해 운영 비용을 절감할 수 있습니다.

Caution
VPC는 연결되어 있는 Subnet, Internet Gateway, Direct Connect 자원이 있는 경우 해지할 수 없습니다. VPC 서비스의 상태가 Acrive, Error인 경우에만 해지할 수 있습니다. 서비스를 해지하면 운영 중인 서비스가 즉시 중단될 수 있습니다. 서비스 중단 시 발생하는 영향을 충분히 고려한 후 해지 작업을 진행하세요.

VPC를 해지하려면 다음 절차를 따르세요.

모든 서비스 > Networking > VPC 메뉴를 클릭하세요. VPC의 Service Home 페이지로 이동합니다. Service Home 페이지에서 VPC 메뉴를 클릭하세요. VPC 목록 페이지로 이동합니다. VPC 목록 페이지에서 해지할 자원을 선택하고, 서비스 해지 버튼을 클릭하세요. 해지가 완료되면, VPC 목록 페이지에서 자원이 해지되었는지 확인합니다.

1.2.1 - Subnet

Create Subnet

You can create and use the VPC Subnet service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

주의
You can request up to three Primary Subnets.

To create a Subnet, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Subnet button. 2. Go to the Subnet creation page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      VPC nameRequiredSelect the VPC to which the subnet will be attached from the list of existing VPCs
      • Display the Availability Zone information of the selected VPC
      • Click + Create New to create a VPC and then select it
      VPC IP rangeSelectionAutomatically input the CIDR range of the selected VPC
      Subnet typeRequiredSelect Subnet type
      • Public: Resources within the Subnet can use Public IP NAT and the Subnet’s NAT Gateway is available
      • Private: Resources within the Subnet cannot use Public IP NAT, but can use the Subnet’s NAT Gateway
      • Local: Available for Virtual Server and Bare Metal Server
        • A Local Subnet is a Subnet for communication only between servers and cannot communicate with external networks
      • VPC Endpoint: VPC Endpoint can be configured
      Subnet classificationRequired선택한 Subnet 유형에 따라 Primary/Secondary Subnet 생성
      • Primary Subnet을 먼저 생성한 후 하위에 동일한 유형으로 Secondary Subnet 생성 가능
      • 네트워크 격리가 필요한 경우에는 Primary Subnet 생성 필요
      • VPC Endpoint 유형은 Primary Subnet만 제공
      Availability Zone필수선택한 VPC가 Multi-AZ인 경우, VPC의 Availability Zone 정보 표시
      • 3가지 Availability Zone이 자동으로 지정됨
      Subnet nameRequiredSubnet name to create
      • Enter using English letters (both uppercase and lowercase) and numbers, within 3 - 20 characters
      IP rangeRequiredIP range to use
      • in IP range format /16 ~ /28 enter within the range
        • Example: 192.168.0.0/24
      • The IP range cannot overlap with IP ranges already in use within the VPC (other subnets)
      Gateway IPRequiredDisplay the Gateway IP address of the Subnet
      • The first IP of the entered IP range is automatically filled in
      • Cannot be modified after the service is created
      표. Subnet 서비스 정보 입력 항목
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      ExplanationSelectionEnter description for Subnet
      IP allocation rangeSelectionRange can be set within the IP range to be used
      • Select between the entire IP range or individual specification
      • Subnet sub-resources receive IP assignments from the entered entire IP range or the individually specified range by the user
        • When individual specification is selected, enter the start IP address and the end IP address
      DNS Name ServerSelectionAfter selecting Use, enter the DNS Name Server IP
      Host pathSelectionUse after selecting, enter the host path
      • Enter the destination IP range and Next Hop IP address
      • Destination IP ranges must not overlap each other
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      표. Subnet 추가 정보 입력 항목
  3. In the Summary panel, verify the detailed information and estimated charges you generated, and click the Create button.

    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Subnet List page.

Check Subnet detailed information

The Subnet service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Subnet Details page consists of Detailed Information, Virtual IP Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view detailed Subnet information, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Subnet button. 2. Go to the Subnet List page.
  3. On the Subnet list page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Subnet Details page.
    • Subnet Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Virtual IP Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      StatusSubnet status
      • Creating: Creation in progress
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Editing: Modification in progress
      • Deleting: Deletion in progress
      • Failed: State where creation failed
      • Error: Unable to determine current state
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Delete SubnetDelete Subnet button
      표. Subnet 상태 정보 및 부가 기능

Detailed Information

Subnet List page lets you view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • Subnet refers to the Subnet SRN
Resource NameSubnet resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the Subnet
Creation date and timeSubnet creation date/time
ModifierUser who modified Subnet information
Modification date and timeDate and time the subnet information was modified
Subnet nameSubnet name
Availability ZoneSubnet’s Availability Zone information
Subnet typeSubnet type
Subnet classificationDisplay the Primary/Secondary Subnet type generated according to the Subnet type
Subnet IDSubnet Unique ID
Primary Subnet nameCreated Primary Subnet information
  • Click the name to go to the detail page
Secondary Subnet nameCreated Secondary Subnet information
  • Click the name to go to the detail page
VPC nameClick the name of the VPC
  • to go to the detail page
IP rangeUsed IP range
Gateway IPSubnet’s Gateway IP address
DHCP IPSecond IP address among the used IP range
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
ExplanationSubnet additional description
  • Edit icon click to edit
IP allocation rangeIP allocation range
DNS Name ServerWhether to use DNS Name Server
Host pathHost route (destination IP range, Next Hop IP address) information
표. Subnet 상세 정보 탭 항목

Virtual IP Management

Subnet list page allows you to view the virtual IP information of the selected resource, and you can reserve or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Virtual IP reservationVirtual IP usage reservation
Virtual IPVirtual IP information
  • Click the IP to go to the Virtual IP detail page
Public Nat IPPublic Nat IP information
Number of connected portsNumber of ports connected to the IP
Reservation date and timeVirtual IP reservation date and time
ReturnVirtual IP Return button
  • Select multiple items and click the Return button at the top of the list to return them in bulk
표. Subnet Virtual IP 관리 탭 항목

tag

On the Subnet list page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of a tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
표. Subnet 태그 탭 항목

Job History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Sunnet List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Work Date/Time, Resource Name, Work Details, Work Result, Operator Information Check
표. Subnet 작업 이력 탭 상세 정보 항목

Managing Virtual IP

You can reserve or manage Virtual IPs to be used in a Subnet.

Reserve Virtual IP

You can reserve a Virtual IP to be used in the Subnet.

To reserve a Virtual IP, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Subnet button. 2. Navigate to the Subnet List page.
  3. On the Subnet list page, click the resource to reserve a Virtual IP. 3. Subnet Details Navigate to the page.
  4. On the Subnet Details page, click the Virtual IP Management tab. 4. Navigate to the Virtual IP Management tab page.
  5. Click the Virtual IP Reservation button on the Virtual IP Management tab page. 5. The Virtual IP reservation window opens.
  6. In the Virtual IP reservation window, set the detailed items and click OK.
    • Virtual IP: When you select Auto-Generate, an automatically generated IP is reserved, and when you select Enter, you can reserve a manually entered IP.
    • Description: Enter additional description for Virtual IP.
  7. When the reservation confirmation window appears, click Confirm.

Check Virtual IP detailed information

You can view detailed information about the Virtual IP.

To view detailed information about the Virtual IP, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Subnet button. 2. Go to the Subnet List page.
  3. On the Subnet list page, click the resource to reserve a Virtual IP. 3. Subnet Details page.
  4. On the Subnet Details page, click the Virtual IP Management tab. 4. Virtual IP Management Navigate to the tab page.
  5. Virtual IP Management Click the resource to view on the tab page. 5. Navigate to the Virtual IP Details page.
    • *Virtual IP details The page displays the connected ports and detailed information.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Virtual IPVirtual IP address
      Public NAT IPPublic NAT IP address and status
      • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
      • Use after setting, you can select an existing IP or create one to add
        • Public NAT IP cannot be modified after configuration; changes require reconfiguration
      Connection PortPort information connected to the Virtual IP
      • Add button click to add a connected port, you can also connect an existing port or create one to add
      • Disconnect button click to disconnect the port
      ExplanationVirtual IP description
      • Edit click the icon to edit
      ConstructorUser who reserved a Virtual IP
      Creation date and timeVirtual IP reservation date and time
      ModifierUser who modified the Virtual IP information
      Modification date and timeDate and time the Virtual IP information was modified
      표. Virtual IP 상세 정보 항목

Virtual IP Release

You can release unused Virtual IPs in a Subnet.

주의
  • A Virtual IP cannot be released when a Port or NAT IP is attached. * Delete the linked resources first.
  • You can return the Virtual IP only when the Subnet status is Active or Error.

To return the Virtual IP, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Subnet button. 2. Go to the Subnet List page.
  3. On the Subnet List page, click the resource to release the Virtual IP. 3. Go to the Subnet details page.
  4. On the Subnet Details page, click the Virtual IP Management tab. 4. Go to the Virtual IP Management tab page.
  5. On the Virtual IP Management tab page, select the Virtual IP to return and click the Return button.
  6. When the return confirmation window appears, click Confirm.

Terminate Subnet

You can delete an unused Subnet.

주의
  • You cannot cancel the service if there are connected resources. * Delete the connected resources first.
  • You can delete the service only when its status is Active or Error.
  • Since data cannot be recovered after a service is deleted, be sure to fully consider the impact before proceeding with the deletion of a Subnet.

To delete a Subnet, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Subnet menu. 2. Navigate to the Subnet list page.
  3. On the Subnet list page, click the resource to delete. 3. Go to the Subnet Details page.
  4. On the Subnet Details page, click the Delete Subnet button.
  5. After the deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been removed from the Subnet list.

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre‑configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
표. Subnet 선행 서비스

1.2.2 - Port

Create Port

You can create and use the Port service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a port, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Port button. 2. Navigate to the Port creation page.

    • In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      VPC nameRequiredSelect the VPC to create the Port
      • + Create New click to create VPC and then select
      Subnet nameRequiredSelect the Subnet to create the Port
      • + New. Click to create a Subnet, then you can select it
      Port nameRequiredPort a name that is easy to identify
      • English letters, numbers, - using enter within 3 - 20 characters
      IP allocation methodRequiredSelect IP allocation method
      • Automatic allocation: IP is automatically assigned within the IP allocation range of the Subnet
      • Manual entry: The entered IP is assigned within the Subnet’s range
        • When Manual entry is selected, enter the IP address to be used for the Port in Fixed IP address
      ExplanationSelectionEnter description for Port
      Security GroupSelectionWhen Use is selected, click the Select button to select up to 5 Security Groups.
      Table. Port service information input items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
      구분
      required status
      Detailed description
      TagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Port additional information input fields
  3. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Port List page.

Check detailed port information

The Port service allows you to view and edit the complete resource list and detailed information. Port Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed port information, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Port menu. 2. Navigate to the Port list page.
  3. On the Port List page, click the resource (Port name) to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Port Details page.
    • Port Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Tags, Work History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusPort status
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Down: Not connected to the resource, or connected but not operating
      • Error: Current status cannot be determined
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Delete PortButton to delete the port
      Table. Port status information and additional functions

Detailed Information

Port list page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and, if needed, modify the information.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • Port refers to the Port SRN
Resource NamePort resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
Resource IDPort’s unique resource ID
ConstructorUser who created the port
Creation date and timePort creation timestamp
ModifierUser who modified the port information
Modification DateDate and time the port information was modified
Port namePort resource name
Port IDPort resource ID
Subnet nameConnected Subnet name
  • Click the name to go to the detail page
Connected resourceConnected device information
Static IPStatic IP information
MAC addressMAC address information
ExplanationPort description
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
Security GroupConnected Security Group information
  • Edit Click the icon to change the Security Group
Virtual IPConnected Virtual IP information
Table. Port detailed information tab items

Tag

On the Port List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Port tag tab item

Job History

On the Port List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Timestamp, Resource Name, Operation Details, Operation Result, Operator Information
Table. Port operation history tab detailed information items

Delete Port

You can decommission unused ports to reduce operating costs.

Caution
  • If there are connected resources such as Virtual Server or PrivateLink, the service cannot be deleted. * Delete the connected resources first.
  • After a service is deleted, the running service may be stopped immediately. * Fully consider the impact of deleting the service before proceeding with the deletion.

To delete a Port, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Port menu. 2. Go to the Port list page.
  3. On the Port list page, click the resource (Port name) you want to delete. 3. Navigate to the Port Details page.
  4. On the Port Details page, click the Delete Port button.
  5. After the deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been removed from the Port list.

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. Port pre-service

1.2.3 - Internet Gateway

Create Internet Gateway

You can create and use the Internet Gateway service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create an Internet Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Internet Gateway button. 2. Go to the Create Internet Gateway page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      VPC명필수Internet Gateway와 연결되는 VPC를 선택
      • 선택한 VPC의 Availability Zone 정보 표시
      • + 신규 생성을 클릭하면 VPC 생성 후 선택 가능
      • Internet Gateway는 VPC의 Availability Zone에 따라 생성, 3개의 AZ를 사용하는 VPC를 선택하면 Internet Gateway도 3개의 Multi-AZ로 자동 생성
      구분필수Internet Gateway 유형을 선택
      • 전용 Internet Gateway, Secured Internet Gateway, Group Gateway 중에서 선택
      Internet Gateway 명선택IGW 종류_{VPC명}으로 자동 생성
      설명선택Internet Gateway에 대한 설명 입력
      Use firewallSelectionSelect firewall usage
      Whether to save firewall logsSelectionSelect whether to save Firewall logs
      Table. Internet Gateway service information entry items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Internet Gateway additional information input fields
주의
You cannot connect an Internet Gateway and a Group Gateway to the same VPC simultaneously.
  1. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
    • After creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Internet Gateway List page.

Check Internet Gateway detailed information

The Internet Gateway service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Internet Gateway Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.

To view detailed information about the Internet Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. On the Internet Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Internet Gateway Details page.
    • Internet Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusInternet Gateway status
      • Creating: Creating resource
      • Ative: Normal connection status
      • Deleting: Deletion in progress
      • Error: Unable to determine current status
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Delete Internet GatewayInternet Gateway Delete Button
      Table. Internet Gateway status information and additional functions

Detailed Information

Internet Gateway list page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and, if needed, modify the information.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Internet Gateway, it refers to the Internet Gateway SRN
Resource NameInternet Gateway resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the Internet Gateway
Creation date and timeDate and time the Internet Gateway was created
ModifierUser who modified the Internet Gateway information
Modification date and timeDate and time the Internet Gateway information was modified
Internet Gateway nameInternet Gateway name
Internet Gateway IDInternet Gateway 자원 ID
VPC 명VPC 이름
  • 이름을 클릭하면 상세 페이지로 이동
VPC IDVPC ID
CategoryInternet Gateway type
Whether to use Multi-AZIndicates whether Multi-AZ is enabled
ExplanationDescription of Internet Gateway
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
Firewall nameClicking Firewall navigates to the detail page.
Use FireawallWhether to use firewall
NAT GatewayClicking NAT Gateway navigates to the detail page
Whether to store NAT logsWhether to store NAT logs
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify
  • Enabled: Store logs
  • Disabled: Do not store logs
Table. Internet Gateway detailed information tab items

tag

On the Internet Gateway List page, you can view, add, modify, or delete the tag information of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Internet Gateway tag tab items

Job History

On the Internet Gateway list page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Date/Time, Resource Name, Operation Details, Operation Result, Operator Information Check
Table. Internet Gateway operation history tab detailed information items

Internet Gateway Resource Management

You can manage resources, such as enabling Internet Gateway log storage.

Using NAT Log Storage

Reference

To store NAT logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs, and then configure that bucket in the NAT Logging log repository. Then, when you enable log storage in the NAT detail view, NAT logs will begin to be saved to the Object Storage bucket. The log storage settings can be checked in NAT Logging. For more details, refer to NAT Logging.

  • When you set up a log repository, Object Storage fees for log storage will be charged.

To enable NAT log storage, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. On the Internet Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Internet Gateway Details page.
  4. Click the Edit NAT Log Save Option button. 4. Modify NAT log storage setting Navigate to the popup window.
  5. Modify NAT log storage In the popup window, select Use for the log storage, and click the Confirm button.
주의
If the log storage is not configured in NAT Logging, the log storage use setting cannot be enabled.

Disable NAT log storage

To use NAT log storage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. On the Internet Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Internet Gateway Details page.
  4. Click the Modify NAT log saving option button. 4. Modify NAT log storage setting Go to the popup window.
  5. Modify NAT log storage In the popup window, deselect Use for the log storage, and click the Confirm button.
  6. Notification Check the message in the popup window and click the Confirm button.
Caution
If log storage is disabled, the service’s log retention will be halted, and tracking and management through log analysis will not be possible in the event of a security incident.

Delete Internet Gateway

Caution
  • If there are connected resources such as NAT Gateway, Firewall rules, VPN, etc., the service cannot be terminated. * Delete the linked resources first.
  • After the service is deleted, internet communication for VPC sub-resources will be stopped. * Before deleting the Internet Gateway, fully consider the impacts that may occur, and then proceed with the deletion.

To delete an Internet Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. On the Internet Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Internet Gateway Details go to the page.
  4. Click the Delete button on the Internet Gateway Details page.
  5. After deletion is complete, check in the Internet Gateway list whether the resource has been removed.

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. Internet Gateway pre-service

1.2.4 - NAT Gateway

Creating a NAT Gateway

You can create and use the NAT Gateway service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a NAT Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create NAT Gateway button. 2. Go to the Create NAT Gateway page.
    • In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      whether required
      Detailed description
      VPC nameRequired연결될 VPC를 선택
      • 선택한 VPC의 Availability Zone 정보 표시
      • + 신규 생성을 클릭하면 VPC 생성 후 선택 가능
      Subnet명필수연결된 Subnet을 선택
      • 선택한 Subnet의 Availability Zone 정보 표시
      • + 신규 생성을 클릭하면 Subnet 생성 후 선택 가능
      NAT Gateway명선택NAT_GW_{서브넷명}으로 생성
      Multi-AZ 사용 여부선택Multi-AZ 사용 여부 선택
      • 2개 이상의 Availability Zone에 연결된 Subnet을 선택한 경우에만 표시됨
      NAT Gateway용 IP필수Select a Public IP for NAT Gateway
      • If you click + Create new, you can generate the IP and then select it
      ExplanationSelectionEnter description for NAT Gateway
      Table. NAT Gateway service information input items
    • Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • Add Tag 버튼을 클릭한 후 Key, Value 값을 입력 또는 선택
      Table. NAT Gateway additional information input items
  3. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the NAT Gateway List page.

Check NAT Gateway detailed information

The NAT Gateway service allows you to view and modify the full list of resources and detailed information. The NAT Gateway Details page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, Operation History tabs.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the NAT Gateway menu. 2. Go to the NAT Gateway List page.
  3. On the NAT Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the NAT Gateway Details page.
    • NAT Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is organized into Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      StatusNAT Gateway status
      • Creating: In progress
      • Active: Operating normally
      • Deleting: In progress
      Delete NAT GatewayButton to terminate the service
      • Terminate the NAT Gateway when there are no connected services
      • If you terminate the service, the running service may be stopped immediately, so proceed with the termination only after fully considering the impact of service interruption
      Table. NAT Gateway status information and additional features

Detailed Information

NAT Gateway List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit it if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In NAT Gateway, it refers to the NAT Gateway SRN
Resource NameNAT Gateway resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the NAT Gateway
Creation date and timeNAT Gateway creation timestamp
ModifierUser who modified NAT Gateway information
Modification dateDate and time the NAT Gateway information was modified
NAT Gateway nameNAT Gateway name
NAT Gateway IDNAT Gateway resource ID
VPC nameVPC name connected to the NAT Gateway
  • Click the name to go to the detail page
VPC IDNAT Gateway가 연결된 VPC 자원 ID
Subnet 명NAT Gateway가 연결된 서브넷 이름
  • 이름을 클릭하면 상세 페이지로 이동
Subnet IDSubnet resource ID connected to the NAT Gateway
Subnet IP rangeSubnet IP range information
Whether to use Multi-AZDisplay Multi-AZ usage
IP for NAT GatewayNAT Gateway IP information
  • Display two IPs when using Multi-AZ
ExplanationDescription of NAT Gateway
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
Table. NAT Gateway detailed information tab items

tag

On the NAT Gateway List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • A maximum of 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, search the existing list of created Keys and Values and select
Table. NAT Gateway Tag Tab Items

Job History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the NAT Gateway List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Date/Time, Resource Name, Operation Details, Operation Result, Operator Information Check
표. NAT Gateway 작업 이력 탭 상세 정보 항목

Delete NAT Gateway

주의
If you delete the Nat Gateway, all resources in that Subnet will be unable to communicate with the internet, except for resources that have 1:1 NAT configured.

To delete the NAT Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the NAT Gateway menu. 2. Go to the NAT Gateway List page.
  3. On the NAT Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the NAT Gateway Details page.
  4. NAT Gateway Details on the page, click the Delete button.
  5. When the deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been removed from the NAT Gateway list.

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre‑configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
표. NAT Gateway 선행 서비스

1.2.5 - Public IP

Create Public IP

You can create and use the Public IP service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Public IP, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public IP reservation button. 2. Go to the Public IP reservation page.

    • Service Information Input area: enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      CategoryRequiredSelect the gateway to reserve the Public IP
      • Default: Internet Gateway
      Availability Zone필수Public IP의 Availability Zone 선택
      설명선택Public IP에 대한 설명 입력
      표. Public IP 서비스 정보 입력 항목
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      구분
      필수 여부
      상세 설명
      태그선택태그 추가
      • 자원 당 최대 50개까지 추가 가능
      • 태그 추가 버튼을 클릭한 후 Key, Value 값을 입력 또는 선택
      표. Public IP 추가 정보 입력 항목
  3. Summary Review the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Public IP List page.

Check detailed information of Public IP

The Public IP service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Public IP Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.

To view detailed information about the Public IP, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Click the Public IP menu on the Service Home page. 2. Go to the Public IP List page.
  3. On the Public IP List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Public IP Details page.
    • Public IP Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      구분Detailed description
      StatusPublic IP status
      • Attached: connected state
      • Reserved: reserved state
      • Error: status unknown
        • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
      Return Public IPPublic IP Return Button
      표. Public IP 상태 정보 및 부가 기능

Detailed Information

Public IP List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and, if needed, modify the information.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In Public IP, it means the Public IP SRN
Resource NamePublic IP resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the Public IP
Creation date and timeDate and time the Public IP was created
ModifierUser who modified the Public IP information
Modification date and timeDate and time the public IP information was modified
IP addressDesignated (reserved) IP address
Availability ZonePublic IP Availability Zone information
CategoryGateway information with reserved Public IP
Public IP IDPublic IP resource ID
ExplanationDescription of the Public IP
  • Edit Click the icon to edit the description
Connection Resource TypeResource information linked to the designated (reserved) IP address
Connection resource nameWhen you click the name of the resource connected to the designated (reserved) IP address
  • , you will be taken to the detail page
표. Public IP 상세 정보 탭 항목

Tag

On the Public IP List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
표. Public IP 태그 탭 항목

Job History

Public IP List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

구분상세 설명
작업 이력 목록자원 변경 이력
  • 작업 일시, 자원명, 작업 내역, 작업 결과, 작업자 정보 확인
표. Port 작업 이력 탭 상세 정보 항목

Return Public IP

주의
You can only return a Public IP service when its status is Reserved. Check the service status before requesting a return.

To delete a Public IP, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public IP button. 2. Go to the Public IP List page.
  3. On the Public IP List page, click the resource to view its detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Public IP Details page.
  4. On the Public IP Details page, click the Public IP Return button.
  5. After the return is completed, check whether the resource has been deleted from the Public IP list.

Preliminary Service

This service must be installed in advance before creating it. Please prepare by referring to the user guide provided in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCIt is a service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment.
표. Public IP 선행 서비스

1.2.6 - Private NAT

Users can create the Private NAT service by entering the required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating Private NAT

You can create a Private NAT service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and use it.

To create a Private NAT, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Private NAT button. 2. Navigate to the Create Private NAT page.

    • In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.

      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      Private NAT nameRequiredEnter the Private NAT name
      • Enter using letters and numbers, 3 to 20 characters
      Connection resource typeRequiredSelect the connection resource to connect the Private NAT
      • You can choose between Direct Connect and Transit Gateway
      • Transit Gateway can be selected after connecting the uplink line
      Connection resource nameEssentialDisplay entries of the selected connection resource
      • Click + New Creation in the list to create a connection resource
      NAT IP rangeEssentialEnter the NAT IP range to use
      • Enter in CIDR format, e.g., 192.168.2.0/23
      • Cannot overlap with the connected VPC IP or other Private NAT IP ranges
      ExplanationSelectionEnter description for Private NAT
      Table. Private NAT Service Information Input Items
      Reference
      • It must not overlap with the IP range of the VPC connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
      • It must not overlap with other Private NAT ranges that are connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
      • It must not overlap with the IP range of the on‑premise network connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
      • Some IP ranges are reserved for management and cannot be used.

    • Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.

      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      TagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Private NAT additional information input fields

  3. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, verify the created resources on the Private NAT List page.

Check Private NAT detailed information

The Private NAT service allows you to view and edit the complete resource list and detailed information. On the Private NAT Details page, it consists of Detail Information, IP Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view detailed information about Private NAT, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Private NAT menu. 2. Go to the Private NAT List page.
  3. Private NAT List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Private NAT Details page.
    • Private NAT Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, IP Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusPrivate NAT status
      • Active: Running
      • Creating: In progress
      • Deleting: In progress
      • Error: An error occurred
      Delete Private NATButton to delete Private NAT
      Table. Private NAT status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Private NAT List page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if necessary.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NamePrivate NAT resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created a Private NAT
Creation date and timeDate and time the Private NAT was created
ModifierUser who modified the Private NAT information
Modification dateDate and time the Private NAT information was modified
Private NAT namePrivate NAT resource name
Connection resource typeInformation about resources connected to Private NAT
NAT IP rangeNAT IP range information in use
Connection resource nameClicking the resource information or resource name linked to the Private NAT navigates to the detailed information page.
ExplanationDescription of Private NAT
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit the description
Table. Private NAT detailed information tab items

IP Management

Private NAT List page allows you to view the Private NAT IP, and you can reserve or release it.

CategoryDetailed description
Private NAT IP ListActive Private NAT list
  • Private NAT IP, associated resources, and status can be viewed
  • Click the Private NAT IP Reservation button to add an IP
  • Click the Release button to delete the selected IP
Table. Private NAT IP Management Tab Items

Tag

On the Private NAT List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Private NAT Tag tab items

Job History

On the Private NAT List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Timestamp, Resource Name, Operation Details, Operation Result, Operator Information Check
Table. Private NAT operation history tab detailed information items

Managing Private NAT IP

You can reserve or release a Private NAT IP.

Reserve Private NAT IP

To reserve a Private NAT IP, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Private NAT menu. 2. Private NAT List Go to the page.
  3. Private NAT List page, click the resource to reserve an IP. 3. Go to the Private NAT Details page.
  4. On the Private NAT Details page, click the IP Management tab. 4. Navigate to the IP Management tab page.
  5. Click the IP Management tab page’s Private NAT IP Reservation button. 5. The Private NAT IP reservation window appears.
  6. Enter the Private NAT IP to be used in the Private NAT IP reservation window and click the Confirm button. 6. A notification confirmation dialog appears.
  7. In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button. 7. Check whether a resource entry has been added to the IP list.

Return Private NAT IP

Caution
You can only return a Private NAT IP when its status is Reserved.

To return the Private NAT IP, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Private NAT menu. 2. Navigate to the Private NAT List page.
  3. On the Private NAT List page, click the resource to reserve an IP. 3. Go to the Private NAT Details page.
  4. On the Private NAT Details page, click the IP Management tab. 4. Navigate to the IP Management tab page.
  5. On the IP Management tab page, click the Return button for the IP item you want to return. 5. A notification confirmation dialog appears.
  6. Verify that the selected resource has been deleted from the IP list.

Delete Private NAT

You can cancel unused Private NAT to reduce operating costs.

Caution
If the Private NAT service status is Creating, Editing, or Deleting, the service cannot be terminated.

To cancel Private NAT, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Private NAT menu. 2. Go to the Private NAT List page.
  3. On the Private NAT List page, click the resource to delete. 3. Go to the Private NAT Details page.
  4. On the Private NAT Details page, click the Delete Private NAT button.
  5. After termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted from the Private NAT list.

Preliminary service

This service must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the user guide provided in advance.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform environment.
Table. Private NAT Preliminary Service

1.2.7 - VPC Endpoint

Create VPC Endpoint

You can create and use a VPC Endpoint service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a VPC Endpoint, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC Endpoint button. 2. VPC Endpoint creation page.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      구분
      필수 여부
      상세 설명
      VPC명RequiredSelect the VPC to create the Endpoint
      • Display the Availability Zone information of the selected VPC
      • + Create new click to create the VPC and then select it
      Usage purpose > Target serviceRequiredSelect the target service for creating the VPC Endpoint
      Usage > Connected ResourcesRequiredSelect the resource to create the VPC Endpoint
      VPC Endpoint nameRequiredEnter VPC Endpoint name
      • Enter using letters and numbers, 3 to 20 characters
      VPC Endpoint IP > Subnet namerequiredSelect VPC Endpoint Subnet
      • Display the Availability Zone information of the selected Subnet
      • Click + Create new to create a Subnet and then select it
      VPC Endpoint IP > IPRequiredEnter the IP to be used for the VPC Endpoint
      • Example: 192.168.x.x
      DescriptionSelectionEnter description for VPC Endpoint
      Table. VPC Endpoint Service Information Input Items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. VPC Endpoint additional information input fields
      Reference

      After registering the VPC Endpoint, you must configure the Direct Connect firewall to integrate internal services of the Samsung Cloud Platform. Refer to the port information for each service and register the firewall rules.

      servicePort information
      DNSTCP 53, UDP 53
      Object StorageTCP 8080, 8443, 80, 443, 4430
      File Storage(NFS) TCP/UDP common 111, 300, 302, 304, 2049, 635, 4045, 4046, 4049
      (CIFS) UDP 135, 137, 138, 389 / TCP 135, 139, 445, 40001
      Container Registry (authentication server, Registry)TCP 443
      Table: Allowed ports per target service
  3. Summary Verify the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, then click the Create button.

    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the VPC Endpoint List page.

Check VPC Endpoint detailed information

The VPC Endpoint service lets you view and modify the full list of resources and detailed information. VPC Endpoint Detail page consists of Detail Information, Tags, Operation History tabs.

Endpoint To view detailed information, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the VPC Endpoint menu. 2. Navigate to the VPC Endpoint List page.
  3. On the VPC Endpoint List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. VPC Endpoint Details Navigate to the page.
    • VPC Endpoint Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusVPC Endpoint status
      • Active: operating normally
      • Creating: creation in progress
      • Deleting: deleting resource attachment
      • Deleted: resource attachment deleted
      Delete VPC EndpointButton to delete the VPC Endpoint connection resource
      Table. VPC Endpoint status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the VPC Endpoint List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • VPC Endpoint refers to the VPC Endpoint SRN
Resource NameVPC Endpoint resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the VPC Endpoint
Creation Date/TimeVPC Endpoint creation time
ModifierUser who modified the VPC Endpoint information
Modification date and timeDate and time the VPC Endpoint information was modified
VPC Endpoint nameVPC Endpoint name
VPC nameConnected VPC name
  • Click the name to go to the detail page
VPC IDConnected VPC ID
Target ServiceConnected Object Storage information
Connection resource informationConnected resource information
Subnet nameEndpoint subnet information
  • Click the name to go to the detail page
VPC Endpoint IPVPC Endpoint IP information
DescriptionDescription of VPC Endpoint
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify
Table. VPC Endpoint detailed information tab items

Tag

VPC Endpoint List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the tag’s Key, Value information
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search the existing list of created Keys and Values and select
Table. VPC Endpoint Tag tab items

Job History

VPC Endpoint List You can view the operation history of the selected resource on this page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation date and time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information verification
Table. VPC Endpoint operation history tab detailed information items

Delete VPC Endpoint

You can terminate unused Endpoints to reduce operating costs.

Caution
  • If there are connected resources such as Object Storage or Container Registry, the service cannot be terminated. * Delete the connected resources first. VPC Endpoint를 삭제하면 운영 중인 서비스가 즉시 중단될 수 있습니다. 서비스 삭제 시 발생하는 영향을 충분히 고려한 후 삭제 작업을 진행하세요.

VPC Endpoint를 해지하려면 다음 절차를 따르세요. 모든 서비스 > Networking > VPC 메뉴를 클릭하세요. VPC의 Service Home 페이지로 이동합니다. Service Home 페이지에서 VPC Endpoint 메뉴를 클릭하세요. VPC Endpoint 목록 페이지로 이동합니다. VPC Endpoint 목록 페이지에서 삭제할 자원을 클릭하세요. VPC Endpoint 상세 페이지로 이동합니다. VPC Endpoint 상세 페이지에서 Endpoint 삭제 버튼을 클릭하세요. 해지가 완료되면, VPC Endpoint 목록에서 자원이 삭제되었는지 확인하세요.

선행 서비스 {#service}

해당 서비스를 생성하기 전에 미리 구성되어 있어야 하는 서비스 목록입니다. 자세한 내용은 각 서비스 별로 제공되는 가이드를 참고하여 사전에 준비해주세요.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment.
NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network with Samsung Cloud Platform.
Table. VPC Endpoint prerequisite service

1.2.8 - VPC Peering

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the VPC Peering service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create VPC Peering

You can create and use the VPC Peering service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a VPC Peering, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC Peering button. You will be taken to the Create VPC Peering page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      VPC Peering nameRequiredEnter VPC Peering name
      • Enter using letters and numbers, 3~20 characters
      Requested VPC nameRequiredSelect the VPC to request VPC Peering
      • Click + New in the list to create a VPC
      Approved AccountRequiredSelect the account of the VPC to approve VPC peering, then select that VPC or enter its information
      • Same account: select the approved VPC name
        • Click + New creation in the list to create a VPC
      • Different account: enter the approved Account ID and approved VPC ID
      descriptionSelectEnter a description of VPC Peering
      Table. VPC Peering service information input items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Whether required
      Detailed description
      TagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
      Table. VPC Peering additional information input fields
  3. Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the Summary panel, and click the Create button.
    • When connecting a VPC from another Account, the peering proceeds after an approval process, so the connection may take some time.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the VPC Peering List page.

Check VPC Peering details

The VPC Peering service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. VPC Peering Details page consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed VPC Peering information, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the VPC Peering menu. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. VPC Peering List Click the resource to view detailed information on the page. You will be taken to the VPC Peering Details page.
    • VPC Peering Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusVPC Peering status
      • Active: operational
      • Requesting: connection or deletion request in progress
      • Creating: connecting
      • Creating Requesting: connection request in progress
      • Deleting Requesting: deletion request in progress
      • Editing: editing
      • Rejected: rejected
      • Canceled: canceled
      • Error: error occurred
        • If it persists, contact the registered administrator
      VPC Peering deletion/VPC Peering deletion requestButton to request deletion of VPC Peering resources
      • Cancel Connection Request: Can cancel if a VPC Peering connection was requested
      • Approve Connection: Can approve when a VPC Peering connection request is received
        • Reject Connection: Click to reject the connection
      • Cancel Deletion Request: Can cancel if a VPC Peering deletion was requested
      • Approve Deletion: Can approve when a VPC Peering deletion request is received
        • Reject Deletion: Click to reject the deletion
      • Reapproval Request: Request reapproval when VPC approval was denied
      Table. VPC Peering status information and additional features

Detailed Information

VPC Peering List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit it if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameVPC Peering resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the VPC Peering
Creation dateTimestamp of VPC Peering creation
EditorUser who modified the VPC Peering information
Modification date and timeTimestamp of VPC Peering information modification
VPC Peering nameVPC Peering name
Request informationThe VPC name and VPC ID information of the VPC that requested VPC Peering, clicking the VPC name navigates to the detail information page
  • When connecting to a VPC in another account, the VPC name is not displayed
Approval informationThe VPC name and VPC ID of the VPC that approved the VPC peering; clicking the VPC name takes you to the detail page
  • When connecting to a VPC in another account, the VPC name is not displayed
ExplanationDescription of VPC Peering
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify the description
Table. VPC Peering detailed information items

rule

VPC Peering List page lets you view the rules associated with the selected resource, and add or remove them.

CategoryDetailed description
List of rulesConnected Rules List
  • You can view the source, destination, destination IP range, and status of connected rules
  • Click the Add Rule button to add a rule
  • Click the Delete button to delete the selected rule
Table. VPC Peering rule tab items

tag

VPC Peering List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. VPC Peering Tag Tab Items

Job History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the VPC Peering List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Check operation date and time, resource name, operation details, operation result, and operator information
Table. VPC Peering operation history tab detailed information items

Managing VPC Peering Rules

You can add or delete rules for VPC Peering.

Add Rule

Caution
  • You can add rules only when the VPC peering status is Active.
  • If you enter the destination IP incorrectly in the routing configuration, communication failures may occur. Verify the destination IP information once more before creating the rule.

To add a rule to VPC Peering, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. On the VPC Peering List page, click the resource to delete. Navigate to the VPC Peering Details page.
  4. On the VPC Peering Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
  5. On the Rule tab page, click the Add Rule button. The Add Rule dialog appears.
  6. Enter the origin and destination in the rule addition window and click the Confirm button. A notification confirmation window will appear.
    • It must not duplicate an already entered rule.
    • You can enter within the IP address range of the destination VPC.
    • It should be entered the same as the subnet range.
    • The destination IP range 0.0.0.0/0 cannot be used.
  7. Click the Confirm button in the notification dialog. Verify that the resource entry has been added to the rule list.

Delete Rule

Caution
  • You can delete the connected rules only when the VPC Peering service status is ACtive or Error.
  • If the status of the linked rule is Creating or Deleting, it cannot be deleted.

To delete a VPC Peering rule, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the VPC Peering menu. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. On the VPC Peering List page, click the resource you want to delete. Navigate to the VPC Peering Details page.
  4. VPC Peering Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
  5. Rule tab page, click the Delete button of the item to delete. A notification confirmation dialog appears.
  6. Click the Confirm button in the alert dialog. Verify that the selected resource in the rule list has been deleted.

Terminate VPC Peering

You can terminate unused VPC Peering to reduce operating costs.

Caution
  • If a rule is attached to the VPC Peering, you cannot terminate the service. Delete all attached rules before terminating the service.
  • You can only terminate the VPC Peering service when its status is Active, Rejected, Canceled, or Error.

Terminate VPC Peering of the same Account

To terminate a VPC peering within the same account, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. On the VPC Peering List page, click the resource to delete. Navigate to the VPC Peering Details page.
  4. On the VPC Peering Details page, click the VPC Peering Delete button.
  5. After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted from the VPC Peering list.

Terminate VPC Peering connected to another account

To terminate a VPC peering connected to another account, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
  3. On the VPC Peering List page, click the resource you want to delete. You will be taken to the VPC Peering Details page.
  4. On the VPC Peering Details page, click the VPC Peering Delete Request button.
  5. Once the cancellation is complete, verify that the resource has been removed from the VPC Peering list.
    • The deletion request must be approved by the counterpart account for the termination to be processed correctly.

Pre-service

This is a service that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please refer to the provided user guide and prepare accordingly.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. VPC Peering prerequisite service

1.2.9 - Transit Gateway

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Transit Gateway service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Transit Gateway

You can create and use the Transit Gateway service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Transit Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Go to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. Service Home page, click the Create Transit Gateway button. 2. Navigate to the Create Transit Gateway page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Transit Gateway nameRequiredEnter the Transit Gateway name
      • Enter using letters and numbers, 3 to 20 characters
      ExplanationSelectionEnter a description of the Transit Gateway
      표. Transit Gateway 서비스 정보 입력 항목
    • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • Add Tag 버튼을 클릭한 후 Key, Value 값을 입력 또는 선택
      Table. Transit Gateway additional information input fields
  3. Summary Review the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, then click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Transit Gateway List page.

Check Transit Gateway detailed information

You can view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information for the Transit Gateway service. Transit Gateway Details page consists of Detailed Information, Connected VPC Management, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.

To view detailed information about the Transit Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Click the Transit Gateway menu on the Service Home page. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway details page.
    • Transit Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected VPC Management, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      StatusTransit Gateway status
      • Active: operating
      • Creating: creating
      • Editing: editing
      • Deleting: deleting
      • Error: error occurred
      Delete Transit GatewayButton to delete Transit Gateway resources
      Table. Transit Gateway status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Transit Gateway List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit it if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameTransit Gateway resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the Transit Gateway
Creation timestampCreation time of the Transit Gateway
ModifierUser who modified the Transit Gateway information
Modification date and timeDate and time the Transit Gateway information was modified
Transit Gateway nameTransit Gateway resource name
Connection CenterConnected Availability Zone information
Use UplinkUplink information connected to the Transit Gateway
  • Linked services (IGW, BM VPC), quick access to line request/modify/termination click to go to the service request page
ExplanationDescription of the Transit Gateway
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify the description
Firewall connection statusFirewall connection management and status display
  • Firewall connection When you click the button, a connection request
    • After connecting, you can add or delete Firewalls from the list
Table. Transit Gateway detailed information tab items

Connected VPC Management

Transit Gateway List page allows you to view the VPCs attached to the selected resource, and add or delete them.

CategoryDetailed description
VPC listConnected VPC list
  • You can view connected VPC information and status
  • Click the Add VPC Connection button to add a VPC
  • Click the Delete button to delete the selected VPC
Table. Transit Gateway Connection VPC Management Tab Items

rule

On the Transit Gateway List page, you can view the rules linked to the selected resource and add or delete them.

CategoryDetailed description
Rule ListConnected rule list
  • You can view the source, destination, destination IP range, and status of connected rules
  • Click the Add Rule button to add a rule
  • Click the Delete button to delete the selected rule
Table. Transit Gateway rule tab items

Tag

On the Transit Gateway list page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Transit Gateway Tag tab items

Job History

Transit Gateway List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Work date/time, resource name, work details, work result, operator information verification
표. Transit Gateway 작업 이력 탭 상세 정보 항목

Manage Transit Gateway Integration Services

You can request, modify, and cancel the Uplink and Firewall connection services required to use the Transit Gateway service.

To apply for the Transit Gateway integration service, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click Connected Services (IGW, BM VPC), Quick Access to Line Request/Modification/Cancellation. 4. Navigate to the service request page.
  5. On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
    Input fieldDetailed description
    TitleEnter the title of the service request
    • Example: TGW Uplink circuit request
    RegionSelect the location of Samsung Cloud Platform
    • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
    ServiceSelect service category and service
    • Service Category: Networking
    • Service: Transit Gateway
    Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
    • TGW Uplink line application/modification/termination: After selecting the work classification, enter detailed information in the service request classification item
    ContentFill in the detailed items of the service request form
    • Service request type: manually enter one of Apply / Modify / Terminate
    • Account name/ID: Enter the account name and ID
    • Transit Gateway name/ID: Enter the created Transit Gateway name and ID
    • Applicant information: Enter applicant’s email, phone number, etc.
    • Service request task type: select and enter either Uplink line connection or BM VPC Firewall connection
    • Firewall usage: Enter whether the firewall is used
    AttachmentIf you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload
    • You can attach up to 5 files, each within 5 MB
    • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
    Table. Linked Service Creation Request Items
  6. On the service request page, click the Request button.
    • After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    • When the service request operation is completed, you can view the requested resources on the Transit Gateway Details page.
Reference

VPC connection for BareMetal

  • VPC Peering does not support firewalls.
  • If you cannot use a Security Group, as with BareMetal, you can set up VPC Peering using a Transit Gateway firewall.
    • However, in a peered BM VPC, communication via UpLink (external) is not possible, and it cannot be connected to a Transit Gateway together with other VM VPCs.

Managing VPC connections of Transit Gateway

You can add or remove VPCs in a Transit Gateway.

Add VPC connection

To add a VPC attachment to a Transit Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to delete. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Manage Connected VPC tab. 4. Connected VPC Management tab page.
  5. On the Connection VPC Management tab page, click the Add VPC Connection button. 5. The VPC connection addition window appears.
  6. In the VPC addition window, select the VPC and click the Confirm button. 6. A notification confirmation window appears.
    • Click +New in the list to create and select a VPC.
  7. Click the Confirm button in the alert dialog. 7. Check whether a resource item has been added in the VPC connection list.

Delete VPC connection

To delete a Transit Gateway’s VPC attachment, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Navigate to the Transit Gateway Details page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Connected VPC Management tab. 4. Go to the Connected VPC Management tab page.
  5. Connected VPC Management tab page, click the Delete button for the item you want to delete. 5. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. In the notification dialog, click the Confirm button. 6. Verify that the selected resource has been deleted from the VPC connection list.

Managing Transit Gateway Rules

You can add or delete rules in the Transit Gateway.

Add rule

주의
  • You can add rules only when the Transit Gateway service status is Active.
  • If you enter the destination IP incorrectly in the routing configuration, communication failures may occur. * Please double-check the destination IP information before creating the rule.
Reference

Transit Gateway must complete both routing rule registration and firewall rule registration to operate correctly.

  • Register routing rule
    • Rule 1: VPC - Transit Gateway rule registration
    • Rule 2: VPC - Uplink rule registration (when connecting the Uplink line)
  • Register firewall rule
    • Add a Transit Gateway firewall and add its purpose (e.g., TGW Uplink, TGW BM VPC, etc.).
      Next, select the firewall from the firewall product list and register the rule. (When adding a firewall purpose, the default is set to All/deny)

To add a rule to the Transit Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Transit Gateway Details Navigate to the page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
  5. On the Rule tab page, click the Add Rule button. 5. The rule addition window appears.
  6. In the rule addition window, enter the origin and destination, and click the Confirm button. 6. A notification confirmation window appears.
    CategoryDetailed description
    Rule typeSelect type for adding Transit Gateway rule
    • Select between VPC‑TGW rule and TGW‑Uplink rule
    Connected VPC nameSelect the connected VPC when choosing a VPC‑TGW rule
    originWhen selecting a VPC‑TGW rule, the destination is automatically selected when configured.
    DestinationSelect rule destination
    • When selecting a VPC-TGW rule, set between VPC and TGW
    • When selecting a TGW-Uplink rule, set between TGW and remote site
      • Cannot register duplicate of existing rules; can input up to the x.x.x.x/28 range
    Destination IP rangeEnter the destination IP range to use
    Table. Add rule input item
    Caution
    • VPC-TGW Rules When entering, please check the following items.
      • When the destination is a VPC.
        • You can enter within the VPC IP address range.
        • It should be entered the same as the subnet range.
        • The destination IP range 0.0.0.0/0 cannot be used.
      • When the destination is a Transit Gateway.
        • Some IP ranges cannot be used because they are reserved for management.
        • The VPC IP address range cannot be entered.
        • The destination IP range 0.0.0.0/0 can be entered only when the VPC’s Internet Gateway is not attached.
    • TGW-Uplink Rule When entering, check the following items.
      • When the destination is a Transit Gateway.
        • You can enter it within the IP address range of the VPC connected to the Transit Gateway.
        • The destination IP range 0.0.0.0/0 cannot be used.
      • When the destination is remote
        • The VPC IP address range connected to the Transit Gateway cannot be entered.
        • The destination IP range 0.0.0.0/0 can be entered only when the Transit Gateway does not have an Internet Gateway attached.
        • D and E class IP ranges cannot be entered.
  7. Click the Confirm button in the notification dialog. 7. Verify that a resource entry has been added to the rule list.

Delete rule

Caution
  • You can delete the rule only when the Transit Gateway service status is Active.
  • If the rule status is Creating or Deleting, the rule cannot be deleted.

To delete a Transit Gateway rule, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to delete. 3. Transit Gateway Details Navigate to the page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Navigate to the Rules tab page.
  5. Click the Delete button for the item to be deleted on the Rules tab page. 5. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. In the notification dialog, click the Confirm button. 6. Verify that the selected resource has been deleted from the rule list.

Firewall Connection Management

You can attach or detach a firewall for use with the Transit Gateway.

Connect to Firewall

Follow these steps to add a Firewall connection to the Transit Gateway.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to connect the Firewall. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Details tab. 4. Go to the Detailed Information tab page.
  5. Detailed Information tab page, click the Firewall Connection button. 5. Firewall connection confirmation window appears.
  6. In the Firewall connection confirmation window, click the Confirm button. 6. Verify the connection status in the Firewall connection status item.

Add Firewall

After the Firwall connection is completed, you can add a Firewall.

Follow these steps to add a Firewall to the Transit Gateway.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to which you want to add a Firewall. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Detailed Information tab. 4. Navigate to the Detailed Information tab page.
  5. On the Detailed Information tab page, click the Add button in the Firewall list. 5. Firewall addition window appears.
  6. In the Firewall addition window, select the purpose and the connection center, then click the Confirm button. 6. Verify that a resource item has been added to the Firewall list.
    • Connection Center can be selected only when the selected firewall is Multi-AZ. * When you select the Active connection center, the Standby connection center is assigned automatically.

Delete Firewall

After the Firwall connection is completed, you can delete the Firewall.

To delete a firewall from a Transit Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the VPC Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to delete the Firewall. 3. Transit Gateway Details Navigate to the page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Details tab. 4. Navigate to the Detailed Information tab page.
  5. Click the Delete button on the Detailed Information tab page of the Firewall list. 5. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. Click the Confirm button in the notification dialog. 6. Verify that the resource entry has been removed from the Firewall list.

Disconnect Firewall

You can disconnect unused Firewall connections.

주의
You can only disconnect when the Firewall service status is Active or Error.

To detach the Firewall from the Transit Gateway, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to detach the Firewall connection. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Details tab. 4. Navigate to the Detailed Information tab page.
  5. On the Detailed Information tab page, click the Disconnect Firewall button. 5. A notification confirmation window appears.
  6. Click the Confirm button in the alert dialog. 6. Check the disconnected status in the Firewall connection status item.

Terminate Transit Gateway

You can terminate unused Transit Gateways to reduce operating costs.

Caution
  • You cannot cancel the service if the Uplink connected to the Transit Gateway is in use or if a firewall is connected. * After completing the termination request for the connected resource, terminate the service.
  • If VPC resources or rules are attached to the Transit Gateway, the service cannot be terminated. * Delete all linked resources and rules, then terminate the service.
  • If the Transit Gateway service status is Creating or Deleting, the service cannot be terminated.

To cancel the Transit Gateway, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
  3. Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
  4. On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Transit Gateway Delete button.
  5. After termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted from the Transit Gateway list.

Preliminary Service

This service must be installed in advance before creating it. Please refer to the user guide provided in advance and prepare.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCIt is a service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment.
표. Transit Gateway 선행 서비스

1.2.10 - PrivateLink Service

Users can create the PrivateLink Service by entering the required information through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and selecting detailed options.

Create PrivateLink Service

You can create and use a PrivateLink Service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a PrivateLink Service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create PrivateLink Service button. 2. Navigate to the Create PrivateLink Service page.
    • In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      PrivateLink Service nameRequiredEnter PrivateLink Service name
      Approval methodRequiredPrivateLink Service approval method selection input
      • Automatic: Automatic approval when a PrivateLink Service connection request is received
      • Manual: Manual approval after verification when a PrivateLink Service connection request is received
      • The approval method cannot be changed after creation
      High-speed data transmissionSelectionThe default setting is not used and does not appear in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console
      • To use high-speed data transfer, submit a service usage request in Support Center > 문의하기, and once processing is complete, it can be selected on the screen
      VPC nameRequiredSelect VPC to connect
      • + New click to create a VPC and then select it
      Subnet namerequiredSelect the Subnet of the VPC to connect
      • Click + Create new to create a Subnet and then select it
      PrivateLink Service IPRequiredSelect the Subnet to connect and enter the PrivateLink Service IP
      • IP addresses already in use within the Subnet cannot be entered, and the first/last IP of the Subnet IP range cannot be used
      connection resourceRequiredSelect resources to connect to the selected VPC
      • Load Balancer: Select the Load Balancer to connect (cannot select LB when using a Local subnet)
      • IP: Enter the Compute resource IP of the selected VPC
      Security GroupSelectSelect button to click and choose the Security Group to connect
      • Up to 5 can be selected
      • If no Security Group is selected, all connections are blocked
      DescriptionSelectEnter a description for the PrivateLink Service
      Table. PrivateLink Service service information input items
    • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • Add Tag button, then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. PrivateLink Service additional information input fields
  3. Summary Verify the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, then click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the PrivateLink Service List page.
Reference

The PrivateLink product is a service that provides a unidirectional private path (a type of tunnel). The PrivateLink product is used by creating a PrivateLink Service (egress) in the service provider’s account, creating a PrivateLink Endpoint (ingress) in the user’s account, and then connecting to the PrivateLink Service.

The connection requirements for the PrivateLink product are as follows.

  • When creating a PrivateLink Endpoint, you can connect only to the single PrivateLink Service you specified per endpoint. * (Only one pair of entrance and exit exists)
  • Unable to attempt a session connection to a PrivateLink Endpoint through the PrivateLink Service. * (unidirectional)
  • In the provider account, when creating a PrivateLink Service, you can provide a connection to a single IP by selecting one LB or entering it manually.
  • In a user account, any client that the user account has allowed to access the PrivateLink Endpoint can use the PrivateLink Endpoint.
    • It can be used in both General and Local Subnet.

Check PrivateLink Service detailed information

The PrivateLink Service lets you view and modify the complete list of resources and detailed information. The PrivateLink Service Details page consists of the Details, Connection Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed information about the PrivateLink Service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PrivateLink Service menu. 2. Go to the PrivateLink Service List page.
  3. PrivateLink Service List on the page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the PrivateLink Service Details page.
    • The PrivateLink Service Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Connection Management, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusPrivateLink Service 상태
      • Active: Running
      • Creating: Creating
      • Deleting: Deleting
      • Error: Error occurred
      Delete PrivateLink ServiceButton to delete PrivateLink Service resources
      Table. PrivateLink Service status information and additional features

Detailed Information

PrivateLink Service List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NamePrivateLink Service resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the PrivateLink Service
Creation timestampDate and time the PrivateLink Service was created
ModifierUser who modified the PrivateLink Service information
Modification date and timeDate and time the PrivateLink Service information was modified
PrivateLink Service namePrivateLink Service resource name
PrivateLink Service IDPrivateLink Service ID information
Connection resourceConnected resources of PrivateLink Service
  • Click the resource name to go to the detail page
PrivateLink Service IPPrivateLink Service IP address
VPC nameConnected VPC information
  • Click the VPC name to go to the detail page
Subnet nameConnected Subnet information
  • Click the Subnet name to go to the detail page
Port namePort information of PrivateLink Service
  • Click the Port name to go to the detail page
Security GroupConfigured Security Group information
  • Click the Security Group name to go to the detail page
Approval methodConfigured PrivateLink Service approval method
High-speed data transmissionUse high-speed data transfer for the configured PrivateLink Service
DescriptionDescription of PrivateLink Service
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify the description
Table. PrivateLink Service detailed information tab items

연결 관리 {#admin}

PrivateLink Service 목록 페이지에서 선택한 자원의 연결 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. 연결 요청을 확인하고 승인하거나 거부할 수 있습니다.

CategoryDetailed description
PrivateLink Service listPrivateLink Service connection list
  • View connection information and status, and manage connections
  • Approve: Approve the connection request
  • Reject: Reject the connection request
  • Block: Block the connected PrivateLink Endpoint
  • Reconnect: Reconnect the blocked PrivateLink Endpoint
  • If the connection status is Rejected, Error, actions such as approve/reject cannot be performed
Table. PrivateLink Service connection management tab items

태그 {#tag}

PrivateLink Service 목록 페이지에서 선택한 자원의 태그 정보를 확인하고, 추가하거나 변경 또는 삭제할 수 있습니다.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of a tag
  • A maximum of 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, you can search the existing list of Keys and Values and select
Table. PrivateLink Service tag tab item

Job History

On the PrivateLink Service List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Check operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, and operator information
Table. PrivateLink Service operation history tab detailed information items

Terminate PrivateLink Service

You can cancel unused PrivateLink services to reduce operating costs.

Caution
If the Private Endpoint connected to the PrivateLink Service is in the states Active, Requesting, Creating, Deleting, or Error, the service cannot be terminated.
Delete the PrivateLink Service after configuring the Private Endpoint to block or reject connections.

To cancel the PrivateLink Service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PrivateLink Service menu. 2. PrivateLink Service List Navigate to the page.
  3. On the PrivateLink Service List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the PrivateLink Service Details page.
  4. On the PrivateLink Service Details page, click the PrivateLink Service Delete button.
  5. Once termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted from the PrivateLink Service list.

Preliminary Service

This service must be installed in advance before creating it. Please prepare by referring to the user guide provided in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCIt is a service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment.
NetworkingLoad BalancerIt is a service that distributes server traffic load in a cloud environment.
Table. PrivateLink Service prerequisite service

1.2.11 - PrivateLink Endpoint

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the PrivateLink Endpoint service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating a PrivateLink Endpoint

You can create and use a PrivateLink Endpoint service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a PrivateLink Endpoint, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create PrivateLink Endpoint button. 2. Navigate to the PrivateLink Endpoint creation page.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      구분
      필수 여부
      상세 설명
      PrivateLink Endpoint명RequiredEnter the PrivateLink Endpoint name
      VPC nameRequiredSelect the VPC to connect
      • + Create new click to create the VPC and then select it
      Subnet nameRequiredSelect the Subnet of the VPC to connect
      • Click + New to create a Subnet, then you can select it
      PrivateLink Endpoint IPrequiredSelect the Subnet to connect and enter the PrivateLink Endpoint IP
      • Subnet IP addresses already in use cannot be entered, and the first/last IP of the Subnet IP range cannot be used
      PrivateLink Endpoint IDRequiredEnter the PrivateLink Service ID to connect
      • Enter using letters and numbers, within 3 to 60 characters
      • Before requesting the service, you need to verify the Service ID of the PrivateLink Service to connect, and after creating the Endpoint, you must provide the Endpoint ID to the service provider
      Security GroupSelectClick the Select button to choose the Security Group to connect
      • You can select up to 5
      • If you do not select a Security Group, all connections will be blocked
      DescriptionSelectionEnter a description for the PrivateLink Endpoint
      Table. PrivateLink Endpoint service information input fields
    • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, input or select Key, Value values
      Table. PrivateLink Endpoint additional information input fields
  3. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, verify the created resource on the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.
Reference
  • To request a connection to the service provider via PrivateLink, you must go through an approval process.
  • When requesting a service connection, you must verify the target PrivateLink Service ID in advance.
    • The usage agreement with the service provider must be completed before applying for the service.
  • After the user creates a PrivateLink endpoint, they must provide the endpoint ID to the service provider. * The service provider can verify the user’s Endpoint ID and quickly proceed with usage approval.

Check PrivateLink Endpoint detailed information

The PrivateLink Endpoint service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. PrivateLink Endpoint Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.

To view detailed information about the PrivateLink Endpoint, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PrivateLink Endpoint menu. 2. Go to the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.
  3. On the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. PrivateLink Endpoint Details Navigate to the page.
    • The PrivateLink Endpoint Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is organized into Details, Connection Management, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusPrivateLink Endpoint status
      • Requesting: Connection request pending approval, Cancel request button displayed
      • Active: Creation complete, operating
      • Creating: Creating
      • Deleting: Deleting
      • Disconnected: Connection blocked
      • Rejected: Connection rejected, Re-request approval button displayed
      • Error: Error occurred
      • Canceled: Connection request canceled, Re-request approval button displayed
      Delete PrivateLink EndpointButton to delete the PrivateLink Endpoint resource
      Table. PrivateLink Endpoint status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource namePrivateLink Endpoint resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the PrivateLink Endpoint
Creation Date/TimeCreation time of the PrivateLink Endpoint
ModifierUser who modified the PrivateLink Endpoint information
Modification dateDate and time the PrivateLink Endpoint information was modified
PrivateLink Endpoint namePrivateLink Endpoint resource name
PrivateLink Endpoint IDPrivateLink Endpoint ID information
PrivateLink Service IDConnected PrivateLink Service ID information
PrivateLink Endpoint IPPrivateLink Endpoint IP address
VPC nameConnected VPC information
Subnet nameConnected Subnet information
Port namePort information of the PrivateLink Endpoint
  • Click the port name to view detailed information
Security GroupConfigured Security Group information
  • Click the Security Group name to view detailed information
ExplanationDescription of the PrivateLink Endpoint
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify the description
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint detailed information tab items

Tag

On the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint tag tab item

Job History

On the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Check operation date and time, resource name, operation details, operation result, and operator information
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint operation history tab detailed information fields

Terminate PrivateLink Endpoint

You can terminate unused PrivateLink Endpoints to reduce operational costs.

Caution
If the PrivateLink Endpoint service status is Requesting, Creating, or Deleting, the service cannot be terminated.

To cancel a PrivateLink Endpoint, follow these steps.

모든 서비스 > Networking > VPC 메뉴를 클릭하세요. VPC의 Service Home 페이지로 이동합니다. Service Home 페이지에서 PrivateLink Endpoint 메뉴를 클릭하세요. PrivateLink Endpoint 목록 페이지로 이동합니다. PrivateLink Endpoint 목록 페이지에서 삭제할 자원을 클릭하세요. PrivateLink Endpoint 상세 페이지로 이동합니다. PrivateLink Endpoint 상세 페이지에서 PrivateLink Endpoint 삭제 버튼을 클릭하세요. 해지가 완료되면, PrivateLink Endpoint 목록에서 자원이 삭제되었는지 확인하세요.

선행 서비스 {#service}

본 서비스를 생성하기 전에 미리 설치가 되어야 하는 서비스입니다. 사전에 안내된 사용자 가이드를 참고하여 준비해주세요.

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCIt is a service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment.
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint prerequisite service

1.2.12 - NAT Logging

To store NAT logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs, and then configure that bucket in the NAT Logging log repository. Then, when you enable log storage in the NAT detail view, NAT logs will start being saved to the Object Storage bucket.

To store NAT logs, you need to configure in the following order.

  1. To store NAT logs, you can create a bucket in Object Storage or use an existing bucket. 1. To create a bucket, please refer to Create Object Storage.
  2. To set the bucket for the NAT Logging log repository, please refer to Using NAT Logging Log Repository.
  3. To set the log storage option to Enabled in the NAT detail view, refer to Using NAT Log Storage.

Using NAT Logging Log Repository

To set NAT log storage to enabled, you must first configure the log repository in NAT Logging.

Reference
To set up a NAT Logging log repository, you need an Object Storage bucket for log storage. First, please create a bucket in the Object Storage service. For more details, see Create Object Storage.
  1. Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging menu. 1. Navigate to the NAT Logging List page.
  2. Click the Log Repository Settings button at the top of the NAT Logging List page. 2. Log Repository Settings Navigate to the popup window.
  3. Log storage configuration In the popup window, select the log storage bucket. 3. When you select a bucket, the log storage path is displayed.
  4. Log storage settings In the popup window, verify the log storage bucket and log storage path, then click the Confirm button.
  5. Notification After checking the popup window’s message, click the Confirm button.
information
After configuring the NAT Logging log repository, you must set the log storage option to Enabled in the NAT detail view for logging to begin. For more details, refer to Using NAT Log Storage.

NAT Logging List

When you configure the NAT Logging log storage bucket, the NAT Logging list is displayed.

  • All Services > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging Click the menu. * Go to the NAT Logging List page.
    구분
    필수
    상세 설명
    자원 ID필수NAT 자원 ID
    저장 대상필수NAT 자원 이름
    Registration Date and TimeRequiredNAT log repository registration date and time
    Table. NAT Logging list items
Reference
After configuring the NAT Logging log repository, you must set the log storage option to Enabled in the NAT detail view for logging to begin. For detailed information, refer to Using NAT Log Storage.

Check NAT Logging contents

Refer to the following information to review the saved log entries.

저장된 로그 예시: 2024-10-11T11:19:03,accept,259,17,192.168.2.173,46937,192.168.0.53,53,100.100.14.52,26937

CategoryExplanation
2024-10-11T11:19:03Log date and time (2024-10-11, 11:19:03)
acceptAction (deny / accept)
259Firewall Rule ID (Policy ID) that generated the log
17IP Protocol ID
  • 1: ICMP
  • 6: TCP
  • 17: UDP
192.168.2.173Source IP
46937Departure Port
192.168.0.53Destination IP
53Destination Port
100.100.14.52NAT-translated IP
26937NAT-translated Port

NAT Logging 로그 저장소 미사용하기 {#use-1}

NAT Logging에서 로그 저장소를 미사용으로 설정할 수 있습니다.

모든 서비스 > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging 메뉴를 클릭하세요. NAT Logging 목록 페이지로 이동합니다. NAT Logging 목록 페이지에서 상단 로그 저장소 설정 버튼을 클릭하세요. 로그 저장소 설정 팝업창으로 이동합니다. 로그 저장소 설정 팝업창에서 로그 저장소 버킷미사용으로 선택하고, 확인 버튼을 클릭하세요.

Reference
로그 저장소 설정은 로그 저장 대상이 없는 경우에 변경할 수 있습니다. 로그 저장소 버킷 변경은 미사용으로 선택 및 확인 후 다시 설정하여 변경할 수 있습니다.

1.3 - API Reference

API Reference

1.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

1.5 - Release Note

VPC

2026.07.16
FEATURE Secondary Subnet added
  • The Classification item is added to Subnet and is provided as Primary/Secondary Subnet.
    • The previously provided Subnet is classified as the Primary Subnet.
  • Depending on the type of the Primary Subnet, you can create additional Secondary Subnets beneath it.
2026.07.16
CHANGED Subnet type change provided
  • Subnet type is changed from General/Local/VPC Endpoint to Public/Private/Local/VPC Endpoint.
    • The previously offered General type is changed to Public/Private, and the previously created General type is shown as Public.
2026.03.19
FEATURE Add new VPC feature
  • Provide VPC IP range addition feature
    • You can add a new IP range to the VPC for use.
  • Provides Virtual IP functionality
    • You can reserve a Virtual IP in a Subnet for use.
  • Private NAT feature improvement
    • You can also use Private NAT with Transit Gateway.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Add PrivateLink feature
  • You can connect internal Samsung Cloud Platform data to the VPC and SCP services via a private path without exposing it to the internet.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Add new services besides Transit Gateway
  • Add Transit Gateway feature
    • Easily connect the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform network and serve as a connection hub for multiple VPCs within the cloud environment.
  • Add VPC Peering feature
    • You can communicate via IP over a 1:1 private route between VPCs.
  • Add Private NAT functionality
    • From Compute resources within a VPC, you can use Direct Connect to map the customer’s IP and establish a connection.
2025.02.27
FEATURE Add VPC Endpoint service
  • Add VPC functionality
    • Provides an Endpoint(entry point) that allows access to the Samsung Cloud Platform via a private connection from an external network connected to the VPC.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Change
    • Account, IAM, and Service Home, tags, etc., have been updated to reflect common CX changes.
2024.12.23
FEATURE Add NAT log storage feature
  • A feature to save NAT logs has been added.
  • Decide whether to store NAT logs and you can store the logs in Object Storage.
2024.10.01
NEW Official release of VPC service
  • The VPC service that provides an isolated virtual network space has been launched.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta version release
  • The VPC service that provides an isolated virtual network space has been launched.

2 - Security Group

2.1 - Overview

Service Overview

A Security Group is a virtual logical firewall that controls inbound/outbound traffic generated on virtual servers in Samsung Cloud Platform. The resources that can have a Security Group applied include Virtual Server, Database, Kubernetes Engine, etc. Security Groups are applied to the ports of target resources, and multiple Security Groups can be applied depending on each resource’s characteristics.

When a Security Group is first created, it blocks all inbound and outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any/Deny).

Users can specify an IP address, port, and protocol to create inbound/outbound rules, and only traffic allowed by the created rules can access the target resources.

Diagram
Figure. Security Group diagram

Components

The components that make up a Security Group are as follows.

ComponentDetailed description
Applicable targetResources to which the Security Group will be applied
  • Apply Security Group to Virtual Server, Database, and Kubernetes Engine
  • Security Group is applied to the ports of the target resources, and multiple Security Groups can be applied depending on each resource’s characteristics
Security Group RulesWhen a Security Group is first created, it blocks all inbound and outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any/Deny)
  • Ping and SSH communication between servers in the same subnet are also blocked, and it can be used after the user configures the necessary rules
  • Add inbound/outbound allow rules by specifying the target address, protocol, and port
  • Blocking rules cannot be set
  • Provides a bulk rule creation feature through form creation
Table. Security Group components

Constraints

Samsung Cloud Platform’s Security Group has a default quota (limit) set. There is a maximum number of Security Groups and Security Group rules that can be created. The Samsung Cloud Platform Console is a space where you can view and manage quotas for the Samsung Cloud Platform service and request quota increases for many resources.

CategoryDefault quotaDetailed description
Security Group200 itemsMaximum number of default Security Groups that can be created per account
Security Group rule count100 itemsMaximum number of default rules that can be created per Security Group
Security Group rule count > project1,000 itemsMaximum number of default Security Group rules that can be created per account
Table. Security Group Constraints

Preceding service

Security Group has no prerequisite service.

2.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Security Group service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Security Group

You can create and use the Security Group service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Security Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Security Group button. 2. Go to the Create Security Group page.
    • Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Security Group nameEssentialName of the Security Group to create
      • English letters (both uppercase and lowercase), numbers, and special characters (-) can be used, and up to 255 characters can be entered
      • Duplicate Security Group names are allowed within the project
      Log saving optionSelectionSelect whether to save Security Group logs
      • Enabled: Save logs
      • Disabled: Do not save logs
      • Click Security Group Logging List Shortcut to go to the Security Group Logging list page
      Table. Security Group service information input items
Reference

To store Security Group logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs, and then configure that bucket as the log repository in Security Group Logging.

  • The log storage settings can be verified in Security Group Logging, and for more details, refer to Security Group Logging.
  • When you set up a log repository, Object Storage fees for log storage will be charged.
* **Additional Information Input** area, enter or select the required information.
Category
Required status
Detailed description
tagSelectionAdd Tag
  • Up to 50 per resource can be added
  • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
ExplanationSelectionUser additional description
  • Up to 255 characters can be entered
Table. Security Group additional information input fields
  1. Check the input information and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resources on the Security Group list page.

Check Security Group detailed information

Security Group menu’s Security Group List page allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information.

To view detailed information about the Security Group, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Security Group menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. 2. Navigate to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group list page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Security Group Details page.
    • The Security Group Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
CategoryDetailed description
Service statusSecurity Group status
  • Creating: Creating
  • Active: Operating normally
  • Editing: Changing settings
  • Deploying: Deployment completed
  • Deleting: Terminating
  • Error: Error occurred
Service cancellationCancel service button
Table. Security Group status information and additional features

Detailed Information

View the detailed information of the resource selected from the Security Group list, and modify the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation Date/TimeService creation date and time
EditorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Security Group nameResource Name
Security Group IDUnique resource ID in the service
Security Group rule countThe rule quota and the number of rules currently in use for this Security Group
Security Group rule count per AccountAccount’s Security Group rule quota and the total number of rules used across all Security Groups in the account
ExplanationUser-added additional description
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
Log saving statusSecurity Group log storage option
  • Enabled: Store logs
  • Disabled: Do not store logs
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify the setting
Applied ServiceService type, service name, and status of the service to which the Security Group is applied
Table. Security Group detailed information tab items

rule

Security Group List page allows you to view the rule list of the selected resource and add or delete rules.

CategoryDetailed description
Excel downloadBatch rule entry Excel file download button
MoreAdd-on button
  • Delete: Delete selected rule
Detailed SearchRule Detail Search Button
Add ruleAdd Rule button
DirectionTraffic direction for servers with Security Group applied
  • Inbound: external → server
  • Outbound: server → external
Rule IDUnique ID value for the rule
Target addressTarget address for communicating with a server that has a Security Group applied
Remote Security Group nameThe Security Group resource name displayed when the target is set to a Security Group
Remote Security Group IDSecurity Group ID displayed when the target is set to a Security Group
ServiceProtocol and Port
ExplanationAdditional description written by the user
DeleteDelete rule
Table. Security Group rule tab items

tag

Security Group List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Security Group tag tab item

Security Group List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Date/Time, Resource Name, Operation Details, Operation Result, Operator Information Check
Table. Work History Tab Items

Security Group Resource Management

You can manage resources such as log storage settings and rule additions for a Security Group.

Using Log Storage

Reference

To store Security Group logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs, and then configure that bucket as the log repository in Security Group Logging.

  • The log storage settings can be verified in Security Group Logging, and for more details, refer to Security Group Logging.
  • When you set up a log repository, Object Storage fees for log storage will be charged.

To store Security Group logs, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. 2. Navigate to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group list page, click the resource (Security Group name) to store logs. 3. Navigate to the Security Group Details page.
  4. Click the log saving status edit icon. 4. Edit Log Save Setting Navigate to the popup window.
  5. Modify Log Saving Option In the popup window, select Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
주의
If the log storage is not configured in Security Group Logging, you cannot set the log storage use.

Disable Log Saving

To stop saving Security Group logs, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. 2. Navigate to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) that will not have logs saved. 3. Security Group Details go to the page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of Log Save Option. 4. Edit Log Save Setting Navigate to the popup window.
  5. Modify Log Saving Option In the popup window, deselect Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
  6. Notification Check the message in the popup window and click the Confirm button.
Caution
If you disable log storage, the service’s log storage will be halted, and tracking through log analysis will be unavailable in the event of a security incident.

Add rule

To add a Security Group rule, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. 2. Navigate to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) for which you want to add a rule. 3. Navigate to the Security Group Details page.
  4. On the Security Group Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
  5. Click the Add Rule button in the Rule tab. 5. Navigate to the Add Rule page.
  6. Direct Input tab page, please enter the required information.
  7. After reviewing the rules to add, click the Done button.
    Caution
    If you navigate to another page without clicking the Complete button after entering content on the Add Rule page, be aware that all entered items will be reset.
Category
Required status
Detailed description
Target Input MethodRequiredRule remote type setting
  • CIDR: Set target address by directly entering IP
  • Address Group: Set to target the created Address Group
  • Security Group: Set to target the created Security Group, select this when allowing access to all members within the selected security group
Target addressRequiredIf CIDR is selected, you need to enter the target IP address
  • Enter in CIDR (IP address/subnet mask) format
    • , and - can be used to input multiple addresses up to a maximum of 100 at once
    • To use the entire IP range (ANY), enter ‘0.0.0.0/0’
Address Group nameRequiredIf Address Group is selected, Address Group selection is required.
Security Group nameRequiredIf Security Group is selected, Security Group selection is required.
typeRequiredSelect protocol type to apply the rule
  • Destination Port/Type Selection: Select protocol type
  • Internet Protocol: Enter protocol numbers, up to 100 entries
  • All: Destination port/Type and protocol are selected for the entire range, meaning all ports for all protocols
type > protocolRequiredSelect detailed protocol for the type
  • Choose the desired protocol among TCP, UDP, and ICMP; input fields vary depending on the selected protocol
  • When ICMP is selected in the protocol, you can set the ICMP Type
    • Select a commonly used Type, such as Echo, from the values defined for ICMP Type
    • Click the Add button to add the input value
  • When TCP/UDP is selected in the protocol, you can choose allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP, etc.
    • When entering manually, you can input values from 1 to 65535, and you can enter up to 100 entries at once using commas (,) or ranges (-).
    • Click the Add button to add the input value
  • If Internet Protocol is selected in the type Enter a protocol number within 1 - 254
  • .
DirectionRequiredApplication scope criteria, traffic direction configuration
  • Inbound Rule: External → Server
  • Outbound Rule: Server → External
ExplanationSelectionAdditional description written by the user
Table. Security Group rule addition detailed items

Create rules in bulk

To add multiple Security Group rules at once, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Security Group Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. 2. Navigate to the Security Group list page.
  3. Security Group list page, click the resource (Security Group name) for which you want to add a rule. 3. Go to the Security Group Details page.
  4. On the Security Group Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
  5. In the Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. 5. Add Rule page is accessed.
  6. On the Add Rule page, click the Bulk Rule Input tab.
  7. Click the Form Download button in File Selection. 8. The rule batch input Excel file will be downloaded.
  8. Enter the rule information into the batch rule input Excel file, then save it.
  9. From File Selection, click Attach File to attach the Excel file you created, and click Add.
    • You cannot upload the file if the attached Excel file format differs from the registration form or if the file is encrypted.
    • You can upload up to 100 batch registration rules at a time. * Upload is not possible when the maximum number of registered rules is exceeded.
    • If you exceed the maximum number of rules that can be registered per Account/Security Group, you cannot upload the file.
  10. If the Excel file is added successfully, click the File Upload button.
    • If any uploaded rule contains invalid entries, a rule verification window will appear. * Click Confirm to apply all items except the invalid rules.

Delete rule

To delete a Security Group rule, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Security Group Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. 2. Navigate to the Security Group list page.
  3. On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) to which you want to add a rule. 3. Security Group Details Navigate to the page.
  4. On the Security Group Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
  5. In the Rule tab, click the Delete button for the rule you want to delete.

Security Group Termination

You can delete unused Security Groups.

Caution
If there are resources attached to the Security Group, you cannot terminate the Security Group service. Delete all connected resources and terminate the service.

To cancel the Security Group, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Security Group Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. 2. Go to the Security Group list page.
  3. Security Group List page, select the resource (Security Group name) to terminate, and click the Terminate Service button.
  4. After termination is complete, check the Security Group list page to see if the resource has been deleted.

2.2.1 - Security Group Logging

To store Security Group logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs, and then set that bucket as the log repository in Security Group Logging. Next, on the Security Group Details page, when you enable log storage, the Security Group logs are saved to an Object Storage bucket.

To store Security Group logs, follow the steps below.

  1. To store Security Group logs, you can create a bucket in Object Storage or use an existing bucket. 1. To create a bucket, please refer to Object Storage 생성하기.
  2. To set the bucket for the log storage of Security Group Logging, refer to Security Group Logging 로그 저장소 사용 설정하기.
  3. In the Security Group detail view, to set the log storage option to Enabled, refer to Security Group 로그 저장 사용하기.

Security Group Logging Configure log storage usage

To set the log storage option of a Security Group to Enabled, you must first configure a log repository in Security Group Logging.

Reference
To configure a log repository for Security Group Logging, an Object Storage bucket for log storage is required. First, create a bucket in the Object Storage service. For more details, refer to Object Storage 생성하기.

To enable the log repository for Security Group Logging, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging menu. 1. Go to the Security Group Logging List page.
  2. Security Group Logging List Click the drop-down list located at the top of the page and select Log storage bucket. 2. When you select a bucket, log storage path is displayed.
  3. After verifying the log storage bucket and log storage path, click the Apply button.
information
Security Group Logging after setting the log repository, on the Security Group Details page you must set the log storage option to Enabled for logging to start. For more details, see Security Group 로그 저장 사용하기.

Retrieve Security Group Logging List

If you configure the log storage bucket for Security Group Logging, you can view the Security Group Logging list.

To view the Security Group Logging list, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging Click the menu. 1. Go to the Security Group Logging List page.
  2. Security Group Logging List On the page, check the resources in use and the log storage targets.
    CategoryDetailed description
    Resource IDSecurity Group ID
    Save targetSecurity Group name
    Save registration date and timeSecurity Group log storage registration timestamp
    Table. Security Group Logging list items
    Reference
    After setting the log repository for Security Group Logging, you must set the log storage option to Enabled in the Security Group detail view for logging to start. For more details, see Security Group 로그 저장 사용하기.

Check detailed information of Security Group Logging

Stored logs contain different detailed information for each protocol. Please refer to the content below for details.

TCP / UDP

Stored log example: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,drop,to-lport: tcp,198.19.65.2,6443,192.168.22.131,20427

CategoryExplanation
2024-10-11T02:18:39Log date and time (2024-10-11, 02:18:39)
dropAction (drop / allow)
to-lportDirection
  • to-lport: inbound
  • from-lport: outbound
tcpProtocol (tcp / udp / icmp / ip)
192.168.65.2Source IP
6443Departure Port
192.168.22.131Destination IP
20427Destination Port
Table. TCP / UDP log detailed information items

ICMP

Stored log example: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,allow,to-lport: icmp,192.168.65.2,192.168.22.131,8

CategoryExplanation
2024-10-11T02:18:39Log date and time (2024-10-11, 02:18:39)
to-lportDirection
  • to-lport: inbound
  • from-lport: outbound
allowAction (drop / allow)
tcpProtocol (tcp / udp / icmp / ip)
192.168.65.2Source IP
192.168.22.131Destination IP
8ICMP type ID
Table. ICMP log detailed information items

IP

Stored log example: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,deny,ip,192.168.65.2,192.168.22.131,103

CategoryExplanation
2024-10-11T02:18:39Log date and time (2024-10-11, 02:18:39)
denyAction (drop / allow)
ipProtocol
192.168.65.2Source IP
192.168.22.131Destination IP
103IP Protocol ID
  • 1: ICMP
  • 6: TCP
  • 17: UDP
Table. IP Log Detailed Information Items

Security Group Logging Configure to Not Use Log Storage

In Security Group Logging, you can set the log storage to not be used.

To disable the log repository for Security Group Logging, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging menu. 1. Security Group Logging List Navigate to the page.
  2. On the Security Group Logging List page, click the Log Storage Settings icon at the top. 2. Log repository settings Navigate to the popup window.
  3. Log storage settings in the popup window, select log storage bucket as Not used, and click the Confirm button.
Reference
  • The log storage settings can be changed when there is no log destination.
  • To change the log storage bucket, first change the setting to unused. * You can then reset the settings to make changes.

2.2.2 - Address Group

The user can enter the required information for the Address Group service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, select detailed options, and create the service.

Reference

Address Group is a feature for managing and enhancing Security Groups more efficiently, offering the following advantages.

  • Improved Flexibility of Service Configuration: You can configure services flexibly by exceeding the strict rule count (Quota) limit of Security Group.
  • Performance Optimization: The performance of Security Group operations is improved compared to registering a single rule.

Create an Address Group and use it in the following cases.

  • When registering multiple IPs and the Security Group lacks sufficient rule capacity.
  • When you need to dynamically manage a large number of IPs targeting a specific service port.

To use Address Group, refer to the following steps.

  1. Create an Address Group.
  2. Register the CIDR required for the Address Group.
  3. When adding a rule to a Security Group, specify the previously created Address Group as the target address.
  4. All CIDRs registered in the Address Group are added as a single Security Group rule.
  5. When you add or remove a target address in an Address Group, the change is immediately reflected in all Security Groups that reference that Address Group.

Add Address Group

You can create and use the Address Group service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create an Address Group, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Security Group Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Address Group menu. 2. Go to the Address Group page.

  3. On the Address Group page, click the Add Address Group button. 3. Go to the Add Address Group page.

    • Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.

      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Address Group nameRequiredName of the Address Group to create
      • English letters, numbers, special characters (-_) can be used, and up to 100 characters can be entered
      • The same Address Group name cannot be used within the Account
      Table. Address Group Service Information Input Items

    • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.

      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, input or select Key, Value values
      ExplanationSelectionUser additional description
      • Up to 255 characters can be entered
      Table. Address Group additional information input fields

  4. Check the input information and click the Done button.

    • After creation is complete, check the created resource on the Address Group List page.

Check detailed information of Address Group

Address Group menu’s Address Group List page allows you to view the full resource list and detailed information.

To view detailed information of the Address Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Address Group menu. 2. Go to the Address Group page.
  3. On the Address Group list page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Address Group Details page.
    • Address Group Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Target Addresses, Tags, Operation History tabs.
CategoryDetailed description
Service statusAddress Group status
  • Creating: Creating
  • Active: Operating normally
  • Editing: Changing settings
  • Deploying: Deployment completed
  • Deleting: Terminating
  • Error: Error occurred
Delete Address GroupButton to delete the service
Table. Address Group status information and additional functions

Detailed Information

Address Group list lets you view the detailed information of the selected resource and, if needed, modify the information.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation Date/TimeService creation date and time
ModifierUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Address Group nameResource Name
Address Group IDUnique resource ID in the service
Number of target addresses in the Address GroupNumber of target addresses in use for this Address Group
ExplanationAdditional description written by the user
  • Edit click the icon to edit
Applied Security GroupService name and service ID of the Security Group service to which the Address Group is applied
Table. Address Group detailed information tab items

Target address

Address Group List page lets you view the target address list of the selected resource and add or remove target addresses.

CategoryDetailed description
Excel downloadTarget address bulk input Excel file download button
MoreAdd-on button
  • Delete: Delete selected target address
Add target addressAdd Target Address Button
Target addressTarget address IP information
Table. Address Group Target Address Tab Items

Tag

Address Group List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Address Group tag tab item

Job History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Address Group list page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Work timestamp, resource name, work details, work result, operator information verification
Table. Address Group Work History Tab Items

Address Group Managing Resources

You can add or remove target addresses in an Address Group.

Add Address Group

Reference
You can add up to 1,000 target addresses per Address Group, and you cannot exceed the maximum quantity.

To add a target address to the Address Group, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Security Group Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Address Group menu. 2. Go to the Address Group page.
  3. On the Address Group List page, click the resource to add the target address. 3. Navigate to the Address Group Details page.
  4. On the Address Group Details page, click the Target Address tab. 4. Go to the Target Address tab page.
  5. Click the Add Target Address button on the Target Address tab. 5. Add target address A popup window opens.
  6. After entering the target address, click Confirm.
    • The target address can be entered up to 100 at a time in CIDR (IP address/subnet mask) format using ,and-.
      • In the destination address, you cannot use ‘0.0.0.0/0’, which specifies the entire IP range (ANY).

Delete Address Group

To delete the target address in an Address Group, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Security Group Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Address Group menu. 2. Go to the Address Group page.
  3. Address Group list 페이지에서 대상 주소를 삭제할 자원을 클릭하세요. 3. Go to the Address Group Details page.
  4. On the Address Group Details page, click the Target Address tab. 4. Go to the Target Address tab page.
  5. In the Target address tab, select the rule to delete and click the Delete button.

Terminate Address Group

You can delete unused Address Groups.

Caution
The Address Group service used by the Security Group cannot be deleted. Delete all connected resources and delete the service.

To delete an Address Group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Address Group menu. 2. Go to the Address Group page.
  3. On the Address Group List page, select the resource for which you want to delete the service and click the Delete button.
  4. When the termination is complete, check on the Address Group List page whether the resource has been deleted.

2.2.3 - Migration Rules

Users can retrieve rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and apply them to the V2 service.

Security Group Rule Retrieval

You can import rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and migrate them to the V2 service for use.

Reference
  • With the Migration feature, Security Group rule names transferred to the V2 environment are prefixed with the Migration label.
  • If a Security Group rule description exceeds 255 characters, part of the description is truncated and appended.
  • Each Security Group can have up to 200 rules, and any rule that exceeds the maximum allowable quantity will not be registered.

To retrieve the Security Group rules of V1, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Security Group Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Migration Rules menu. 2. Go to the Migration Rules page.

  3. Select the rule information to retrieve from the Migration Rules page and click Complete.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Original rule environmentSCP v1 (Vmware) Auto-select
    Applicable targetSelect the Security Group list in the account to apply the transferred rule
    Retrieve rulesClick the Attach File button to upload the decrypted Security Group rule file
    • After decrypting and saving the rule file extracted from the original environment, upload it
    List of rulesView uploaded Security Group rule file details
    • Delete: Delete selected rule
    Table: Migration Rules detailed items

  4. After the Security Group rule transfer request is completed, verify that the transfer item has been added to the Security Group list.

Modify the Security Group rules to be transferred

You can edit each item when retrieving rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Follow these steps to modify the Security Group rules to be imported from V1.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Migration Rules menu. 2. Go to the Migration Rules page.

  3. Click Attach File in the Import Rules item to upload the Security Group rule file.

  4. Click Edit on the rule item you want to modify in the rule list.

    Category
    Required status
    Detailed description
    Target Input MethodRequiredRule remote type setting
    • CIDR: Set target address by directly entering IP
    • Address Group: Set to target the created Address Group
    • Security Group: Set to target the created Security Group, select when allowing access to all members within the chosen security group
    Target addressRequiredIf CIDR is selected, you need to enter the target IP address
    • Enter in CIDR (IP address/subnet mask) format
      • ,and-using you can input multiple addresses up to a maximum of 100 at once.
      • To use the entire IP range (ANY), enter ‘0.0.0.0/0’
    Address Group nameRequiredWhen Address Group is selected, Address Group selection is required.
    Security Group nameRequiredIf Security Group is selected, a Security Group selection is required
    typeRequiredSelect protocol type to apply the rule
    • Destination Port/Type Selection: Select protocol type
    • Internet Protocol: Enter protocol numbers, up to 100 entries
    • All: Select destination port/Type and protocol for the entire range, meaning all ports for all protocols
    Type > ProtocolRequiredSelect detailed protocol for the type
    • Select the desired protocol among TCP, UDP, and ICMP; input fields vary depending on the selected protocol
    • When ICMP is selected in the protocol, you can set the ICMP Type
      • Select a commonly used Type such as Echo from the values defined for ICMP Type
      • Click the Add button to add an input value
    • When TCP/UDP is selected in the protocol, you can choose allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP, etc.
      • When entering manually, you can input values from 1 to 65535, and you can enter up to 100 entries at once using commas (,) or ranges (-)
      • Click the Add button to add an input value
    • When Internet Protocol is selected in the type Enter a protocol number within 1 to 254
    DirectionRequiredConfigure the traffic direction for the applicable target criteria
    • Inbound rule: External → Server
    • Outbound rule: Server → External
    ExplanationSelectionAdditional description written by the user
    Table. Detailed items of the Security Group rule edit window

  5. Click Confirm when the rule information edit is complete.

  6. Verify the modified rule information and click Complete.

2.3 - API Reference

API Reference

2.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

2.5 - Release Note

Security Group

2026.05.21
FEATURE Add Security Group rule migration feature
  • For user convenience, a Migration Rules page has been added that allows you to import Security Group rules created in the V1 environment and apply them to the V2 service.
2026.03.19
FEATURE Security Group feature improvement
  • When adding a Security Group rule, multiple service ports can be selected
    • Improved the console to allow selecting multiple service ports when adding a rule.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Securirty Group Add rule input method
  • Add Security Group rule input method
    • A feature allowing IP protocol input has been added.
    • A feature to select Well-known protocols has been added.
2025.02.27
FEATURE Common functionality change
  • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
    • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been reflected.
2025.02.27
CHANGED Security Group feature improvement
  • Improved to allow entering multiple IPs when adding Security Group rules.
2024.12.23
FEATURE Add Security Group log storage feature
  • A feature to store Security Group logs has been added.
  • You can decide whether to store Security Group logs and store the logs in Object Storage.
2024.10.01
NEW Security Group service official version release
  • The Security Group service, which provides virtual firewall functionality for instance resources, has been launched.
  • You can control inbound and outbound traffic generated from instance resources through the Security Group service.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta version release
  • The Security Group service, which provides virtual firewall functionality for instance resources, has been launched.
  • You can control inbound and outbound traffic generated from instance resources through the Security Group service.

3 - Load Balancer

3.1 - Overview

Service Overview

The Load Balancer (LB) service of Samsung Cloud Platform automatically distributes traffic to available servers when there is an unpredictable traffic surge or server failure, ensuring the stability and continuity of customer services.

A Load Balancer serves as the service endpoint provided to clients, is deployed in a VPC subnet according to the service type (L4 / L7), and you can configure multiple services by adding listeners to the created Load Balancer.

The Listener receives client requests through the service port and processes traffic according to routing rules. L4 supports TCP / UDP / TLS protocols, and L7 supports HTTP / HTTPS protocols; in L7, you can specify an LB server group for each routing condition or set a redirect response for the request URL.

The LB server group forwards requests received by the Listener to specific servers based on load balancing and health checks. The servers receive client requests from the Load Balancer’s Source NAT IP through the ports configured for the members, and the server status is periodically monitored by the Load Balancer’s health check IP.

LB health check defines the member health check method registered in the LB server group. You can select a default LB health check resource provided for the LB server group, or create a new one to configure monitoring suitable for the application.

Features

  • Various load balancing methods: Round Robin, Least Connection, IP Hash, etc., are provided.
  • SSL Authentication Encryption and Offloading: Supports SSL offloading and allows selection of encryption level.
  • Enhanced Security: Use a firewall to manage Load Balancer communication and view connection logs by storing logs.

Service Architecture Diagram

Diagram
Figure. Load Balancer diagram

Provided features

  • Load Balancer: Select the service type and configure the IP to be used by the Load Balancer.
  • Listener: Set the protocol, port, and routing rules. You can add multiple Listeners to a single Load Balancer.
  • LB server group: Sets the load balancing method. LB server group can be attached to a single Load Balancer.
  • Member: Select the server to add to the LB server group. You can choose Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server resources created in the same VPC as the Load Balancer, or enter an IP address directly.
  • LB health check: Sets the member health check method. LB health checks can be registered and used across multiple LB server groups.

Component

A Load Balancer consists of a Load Balancer (Listener), LB server group (member), and LB health check.

Load Balancer

The components that make up a Load Balancer are as follows. By configuring each component, you can set up load balancing suitable for the customer’s workload.

ComponentDetailed description
Service CategoryLoad Balancer service type
  • Classification of Listener protocols that can be created according to L4 / L7
Service SunbetAssign the Service IP, Source NAT IP, and Health Check IP required for the Load Balancer in the Subnet range of the VPC Subnet
  • Subnet
Service IPService IP that the client accesses
Source NAT IPIP used to forward server traffic in the Load Balancer
Health check IPIP used for health checks in the Load Balancer
ListenerResources connected to the Load Balancer
  • protocol, port, LB server group settings
Table. Load Balancer components

LB server group

The elements that make up an LB server group are as follows. Traffic is delivered to members of the LB server group according to the settings of each component.

ComponentDetailed description
ProtocolLB server group forwarding protocol
Load balancingTraffic distribution method
  • Deliver traffic to a specific member according to the load balancing method
LB health checkMember health check method
  • LB Select from the list of resources created by the health check
MemberServer that processes client requests
  • Set weights or modify activation status based on load balancing
Table. LB server group components

LB health check

The elements that make up the LB health check are as follows. Member health checks are performed according to the settings of each component.

ComponentDetailed description
ProtocolHealth check protocol
Health check portPort used for health check
PeriodHealth check execution interval
Waiting timeServer response latency for health check
Detection countCriteria for determining member health check status (Healthy / Unhealthy)
Table. LB health check components

Constraints

The Load Balancer of Samsung Cloud Platform has a default quota, which limits the number of Load Balancers, Listeners, LB server groups, and members that can be created. You can manage current usage through the Console and request additional quota for items that can be expanded.

ItemDefault quotaDetailed description
LOAD_BALANCER.SERVICE_SUBNET.DEFAULT.COUNT3Number of Service Subnets per VPC that can create a Load Balancer
LOAD_BALANCER.DEFAULT.COUNT50Number of Load Balancers created per Region
LOAD_BALANCER.LISTENER.DEFAULT.COUNT1000Number of Listeners created per Region
LOAD_BALANCER.SERVER_GROUP.DEFAULT.COUNT1000Number of LB server groups created per region
LOAD_BALANCER.MEMBER.DEFAULT.COUNT1000Number of members that can be registered to the entire LB server group per region
LOAD_BALANCER.HEALTH_CHECK.DEFAULT.COUNT500Number of LB health checks created per region
Table. Load Balancer Constraints

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating a Load Balancer service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. Load Balancer prerequisite service

3.1.1 - ServiceWatch metric

The Load Balancer sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by basic monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.

Reference
Refer to the ServiceWatch guide for how to view metrics in ServiceWatch.

Basic Metrics

The following are the default metrics for the Load Balancer namespace.

The indicators whose names are displayed in bold text below are the key metrics selected from the basic metrics provided by Load Balancer. Key metrics are used to build the service dashboards that are automatically created for each service in ServiceWatch.

Each metric provides guidance in the user guide on which statistical values are meaningful when querying that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the values shown in bold are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, you can view key metrics using primary statistical values.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunitmeaningful statistics
LB StatusLoad Balancer status--
LB Total ConnectionsLB cumulative connection countCount
  • total
LB Total L4 ConnectionsCumulative L4 connection countCount
  • total
LB Total L7 ConnectionsCumulative L7 connection countCount
  • Total
LB Total SSL ConnectionsCumulative SSL connection countCount
  • Total
LB Total TCP ConnectionsCumulative TCP connection countCount
  • Total
LB Current ConnectionsCurrent number of active connectionsCount
  • Total
LB Current SSL ConnectionsCurrent SSL connection countCount
  • Total
LB Peak ConnectionsLB maximum connectionsCount
  • Total
LB Total RequestsLB cumulative request countCount
  • Total
LB Current RequestsLB current request countCount
  • Total
LB Connection Rate (CPS)Number of new inbound connectionsCount
  • Total
LB Forward BytesCumulative bytes transferred from the LB to the serverBytes
  • total
LB Forward Bytes (Delta)Cumulative bytes (Delta) delivered from LB to serverBytes
  • Total
LB Forward PacketsCumulative packets delivered from the LB to the serverCount
  • Total
LB Forward Packets (Delta)Cumulative packets (Delta) delivered from the LB to the serverCount
  • Total
LB Reverse BytesCumulative packets delivered from LB to the serverBytes
  • Total
LB Reverse Bytes (Delta)Cumulative bytes (Delta) received from the serverBytes
  • Total
LB Reverse PacketsCumulative packets received from the serverCount
  • Total
LB Reverse Packets (Delta)Cumulative packets (Delta) received from the serverCount
  • Total
LB Current ResponsesLB current response countCount
  • total
LB Total Success ResponsesCumulative successful response countCount
  • Total
LB Last Response TimeLB last response timeMilliseconds
  • Total
LB Fastest Response TimeLB shortest response timeMilliseconds
  • Total
LB Slowest Response TimeLB maximum response timeMilliseconds
  • Total
LB Total Failure ActionsNumber of failures handled in LBCount
  • Total
Listener StatusListener statusCount
  • total
Listener Total ConnectionsListener cumulative connection countCount
  • Total
Listener Total L4 ConnectionsCumulative L4 connection countCount
  • Total
Listener Total L7 ConnectionsCumulative L7 connection countCount
  • Total
Listener Total SSL ConnectionsCumulative SSL connection countCount
  • total
Listener Total TCP ConnectionsCumulative TCP connection countCount
  • Total
Listener Current ConnectionsCurrent number of active connectionsCount
  • Total
Listener Current SSL ConnectionsCurrent SSL connection countCount
  • Total
Listener Peak ConnectionsMaximum number of connections for the listenerCount
  • Total
Listener Current RequestsListener current request countCount
  • Total
Listener Total RequestsListener cumulative request countCount
  • Total
Listener Connection Rate (CPS)Number of new inbound connectionsCount
  • Total
Listener Forward BytesCumulative bytes transferred from the Listener to the serverBytes
  • Total
Listener Forward Bytes (Delta)Cumulative bytes (Delta) transmitted from the Listener to the serverBytes
  • Total
Listener Forward PacketsCumulative packets transmitted from the Listener to the serverCount
  • Total
Listener Forward Packets (Delta)Cumulative packets (Delta) transmitted from the Listener to the serverCount
  • Total
Listener Reverse BytesCumulative bytes received from the serverBytes
  • Total
Listener Reverse Bytes (Delta)Cumulative bytes (Delta) received from the serverBytes
  • Total
Listener Reverse PacketsCumulative packets received from the serverCount
  • Total
Listener Reverse Packets (Delta)Cumulative packets (Delta) received from the serverCount
  • Total
Listener Current ResponsesListener current response countCount
  • total
Listener Total Success ResponsesCumulative successful response countCount
  • Total
Listener Last Response TimeListener last response timeMilliseconds
  • Total
Listener Fastest Response TimeListener minimum response timeMilliseconds
  • Total
Listener Slowest Response TimeListener maximum response timeMilliseconds
  • Total
Listener Total Failure ActionsNumber of failures processed in the ListenerCount
  • total
ServerGroup StatusLB server group statusCount
  • Total
ServerGroup Request CountCumulative request count for LB server groupCount
  • Total
ServerGroup Response CountLB server group cumulative response countCount
  • Total
ServerGroup 2xx Response CountNumber of HTTP 2xx responsesCount
  • Total
ServerGroup 3xx Response CountNumber of HTTP 3xx responsesCount
  • Total
ServerGroup 4xx Response CountNumber of HTTP 4xx responsesCount
  • Total
ServerGroup 5xx Response CountNumber of HTTP 5xx responsesCount
  • Total
ServerGroup Healthy Member CountNumber of healthy membersCount
  • Total
ServerGroup Unhealthy Member CountHealth check abnormal member countCount
  • Total
ServerGroup Peak ConnectionsMaximum connections for LB server groupCount
  • Total
Table. Load Balancer basic metrics

3.2 - How-to guides

Users can create a service by entering the required Load Balancer information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Load Balancer

You can create and use a Load Balancer service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a Load Balancer, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer click the menu. 1. Go to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. Service Home on the page, click the Create Load Balancer button. 2. Go to the Load Balancer creation page.
  3. On the Load Balancer creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category
Required
Detailed description
Load Balancer nameRequiredLoad Balancer resource name
  • using English uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-_) entered with a length of 3 to 63 characters
Service CategoryRequiredLoad Balancer service type
  • Select L4 or L7
  • Since the service types are distinguished, you cannot configure TCP and HTTP listeners on a single Load Balancer
VPC nameRequiredVPC where the Load Balancer will be created
  • Select from the VPC list
  • + New creation It can be selected after creation
Service Subnet nameRequiredVPC Subnet where the Load Balancer will be created
  • Select from the list of Subnets created in the selected VPC
    • Can be selected regardless of Subnet type (Public/Private) or classification (Primary/Secondary)
  • + New Creation can be selected after creation when chosen
  • By default, a Load Balancer can be created in up to three Service Subnets per VPC
    • The number of Service Subnets is calculated based on Primary Subnets
      • If a Load Balancer is created in Secondary Subnet A-1 or A-2 under Primary Subnet A, one Service Subnet is consumed
      • After creating Load Balancers in Primary Subnets A, B, and C, additional creation is possible in Secondary Subnet A-1
      • If Load Balancers are created in Secondary Subnets A-1, B-1, and C-1, creating a Load Balancer in Primary Subnet D is not allowed
  • Load Balancer creation is prohibited if the number of Service Subnets per VPC exceeds the limit or if the Subnet lacks sufficient available IPs for Load Balancer creation
    • Creating a Load Balancer in a Subnet for the first time requires 4 available IPs
    • If a Load Balancer already exists in the Subnet, only 1 available IP is required
  • If a Load Balancer is already created in the selected Service Subnet, the initially configured Availability Zone, Source NAT IP, health check IP, and Firewall information are displayed
Availability Zone 1RequiredSelect the Availability Zone to create the Load Balancer among the Availability Zones where the Service Subnet is created
  • If only Availability Zone 1 is selected in a Multi-AZ Subnet, the Load Balancer is configured as Single-AZ
  • When creating an additional Load Balancer in the same Service Subnet, selecting an Availability Zone other than the initially configured one is not allowed
Availability Zone 2RequiredThis is an item provided only when a Multi-AZ Subnet is selected for the Service Subnet, and when configuring the Load Balancer as Multi-AZ, set
  • When configured as Multi-AZ, Availability Zone 1 becomes Active to handle all service requests, and if Availability Zone 1 fails, it automatically switches to Availability Zone 2
Service IPRequiredSelect automatic allocation or manual entry for the service IP exposed to the client
  • When manually entering, input one IP from the Service Subnet range in IP address format
  • When automatically allocating, assign automatically from the IP allocation range of the selected Service Subnet
Public NAT IPSelectWhen allowing service access from external (Internet), select the Public IP to connect to the Service IP
  • Configurable if the selected VPC is connected to an Internet Gateway
  • + New can be created and selected when chosen
  • The Public NAT IP of a Multi-AZ Load Balancer can be selected from the Public IPs created in Availability Zone 1
Source NAT IPRequiredSelect automatic allocation or manual entry for the IP used by the Load Balancer for server communication
  • When manually entering, input one IP from the Service Subnet range in IP address format
  • When automatically allocating, the IP is automatically assigned from the IP allocation range of the selected Service Subnet
  • IP cannot be modified after creating the Load Balancer
Health check IPRequiredSelect either automatic allocation or manual entry for the IP used for member health checks in the Load Balancer
  • When entering manually, input two IPs from the Service Subnet range separated by , in IP address format
  • When automatically allocating, the IP is assigned automatically from the IP allocation range of the selected Service Subnet
  • A Multi-AZ Load Balancer requires a total of 4 IPs, with 2 IPs per Availability Zone
  • IP cannot be modified after the Load Balancer is created
Use firewallSelectionSelect whether to enable the firewall for Load Balancer access control
  • Enabled when creating the firewall in an active state
  • Disabled when creating the firewall in an inactive state (can be enabled from the Firewall menu)
Store firewall logsSelectSelect whether to store Firewall logs
Table. Load Balancer service information input items
Reference
Multi-AZ Load Balancer will be subject to additional creation charges after September 2026. Please refer to this for your use.
  • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
    Category
    Required status
    Detailed description
    ExplanationSelectEnter resource description
    tagSelectAdd tags
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    Table. Load Balancer additional information input fields
  1. Check the created service information and the estimated billing amount, and click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Load Balancer List page.
      Information
      • Load Balancer service does not provide access control for Service IP and service ports.
        • When creating a Load Balancer, select Use Firewall to manage communication between the client and the Load Balancer, and between the Load Balancer and members with firewall rules, and enable Save Firewall Logs to store access logs, which is recommended.
      • When creating a service and using the Firewall log storage feature, you must configure the log repository first. * If the log storage configuration is not completed, you cannot create a Load Balancer service.
      Caution

      If you use a firewall, you must add the rules required for Load Balancer communication. Register the rules, paying attention to the direction for each purpose.

      • If you do not add a rule, the Load Balancer service will not operate correctly.
      Diagram
      PurposeSource IPDestination IPProtocolDestination Port/TypeDirection
      Client → LB connectionClient IPLB Service IPListener protocolListener service portOutbound
      LB → Member connectionLB Source NAT IPLB server group member IPLB server group protocolMember portInbound
      LB → Member health checkLB health check IPLB server group member IPHealth check protocolHealth check port
      • When the health check port and member port are different, register the member port
      Inbound
      Figure and table. Add Load Balancer Firewall rule

Load Balancer View detailed information

The Load Balancer service can be viewed and edited for resource lists and detailed information in the Load Balancer menu. The Load Balancer Details page consists of the Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view detailed information about the Load Balancer service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. 2. Go to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Load Balancer Details page.
    • Load Balancer Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Connected Resources, Tags, Operation History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      StatusLoad Balancer resource status
      • Active: Service is active and operating normally
      • Deleting: Service termination request is being processed
      • Creating: Service creation request is being processed
      • Error: Unable to determine current status due to internal error
      • Editing: Service modification request is being processed
      Service cancellationDelete Load Balancer resource
      Table. Load Balancer status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

In the Detailed Information tab, you can view the detailed information of the resource selected from the Load Balancer list and edit the necessary information.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
Creation Date/TimeService creation date and time
Modification dateService modification date and time
ConstructorUser requesting service creation
ModifierService modification request user
Load Balancer nameLoad Balancer name
Service IPService IP of the Load Balancer (used for client communication from the Load Balancer)
Service CategoryLoad Balancer service type
Source NAT IPSource NAT IP of the Load Balancer (used for server communication from the Load Balancer)
VPC nameResource name of the VPC where the Load Balancer was created
  • Click the resource name to go to the detail page
Service Subnet nameSubnet where the Load Balancer is created resource name
  • resource name click to go to the detail page
Public NAT IPLoad Balancer’s Public NAT IP
  • Edit Click the icon to modify the settings
Private NAT IPLoad Balancer’s Private NAT IP
  • Use when NATing the Service IP to the customer’s subnet configured on the Private NAT
  • Click the Edit icon to modify the settings
Health check IPLoad Balancer’s health check IP (used by the Load Balancer for member health checks)
Availability Zone 1Availability Zone information of the created Load Balancer
Availability Zone 2Information about the Availability Zone where the Load Balancer was created
  • Displayed when configured as a Multi-AZ Load Balancer
ExplanationAdditional information or description about the Load Balancer
  • Edit click the icon to edit
Firewall nameFirewall resource name connected to Load Balancer
  • Click the resource name to go to the detail page
Table. Load Balancer detailed information tab items

Connected resource

Connected Resources tab allows you to view the list of Listeners attached to the Load Balancer and to create or delete Listeners.

  • In the Connected Resources tab, when you select the Listener item, you are taken to the Listener Details page where you can view, edit, and delete the detailed information.
  • Listener Details page item, clicking the Edit icon lets you modify the information.
CategoryDetailed description
Create ListenerCreate Listener button
Listener nameListener resource name
Routing rulesRouting rules set on the Listener
  • Routing Action: Traffic handling method (LB server group forwarding or URL redirection)
  • Setting Value: Setting value applied to the routing action
    • When the routing action is LB server group forwarding, display the name of the associated LB server group
      • If there is more than one associated LB server group, it is shown as a number, and clicking the number reveals the list of LB server groups
    • When the routing action is URL redirection, display the redirection target information
ProtocolProtocol that the Listener receives
PortThe service port that the Listener receives
Creation Date/TimeListener creation time
StatusListener resource status
DeleteListener Delete Button
Table. Load Balancer connected resource list items

Tag

On the Load Balancer List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, search the existing list of created Keys and Values and select
Table. Load Balancer Tag Tab Items

Job History

Task History tab allows you to view the task history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Work HistoryTask execution details
Work date and timeTask execution date and time
Resource TypeResource Type
Resource nameLoad Balancer name
Work resultTask execution result (success/failure)
Operator InformationUser information of the person who performed the task
Table. Load Balancer operation history list items

Load Balancer Resource Management

You can manage resources such as creating and deleting a Load Balancer’s Listener.

Create Listener

Create a Listener on the Load Balancer to receive client requests and handle traffic according to the Listener configuration.

information

The protocol that receives client requests varies depending on the Load Balancer service type.

  • L4 Load Balancer case: TCP, UDP, TLS, TCP_PROXY protocols
  • L7 When using an L7 Load Balancer: HTTP, HTTPS protocols

Creating a Listener in L4 Load Balancer

To create a Listener in the L4 Load Balancer, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. 2. Navigate to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource to create a Listener. 3. Load Balancer Details page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. 4. Navigate to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Create Listener button in the upper right.
  6. Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
    • The information that can be entered varies depending on the protocol.
Category
Required status
Detailed description
Load BalancerRequiredLoad Balancer resource name where the Listener will be created
Listener nameRequiredListener resource name
ProtocolRequiredSelect Listener receive protocol
  • TCP, UDP, TLS, TCP_PROXY choose from
Service portRequiredListener receive port input
  • Enter a value between 1 and 65,534
Routing rulesRequiredRouting rule configuration
  • Routing Action: L4 Load Balancer is fixed to LB server group forwarding
  • LB server group: Select an LB server group to handle client requests
    • Can select from LB server groups created in the same Service Subnet as the Load Balancer
    • LB server groups already used by other Load Balancers cannot be selected
Session keep-alive timeRequiredClient session timeout setting
  • Default 120 seconds
  • When using TCP, TLS, TCP_PROXY protocols, you can enter values in 60‑second increments between 60 and 3,600 seconds
  • When using UDP protocol, you can enter values in 60‑second increments between 60 and 180 seconds
Proxy ProtocolSelectionWhen used, the client IP is added to the proxy protocol header and forwarded to the server
  • TCP, TLS, TCP_PROXY protocols can be set when used
  • TCP Proxy Protocol v1 support (client IP is transmitted in plain text)
  • To use this feature properly, the server must also support Proxy Protocol
persistenceRequiredSelect session persistence (Sticky Session) method (available when using TCP, TLS, TCP_PROXY protocols)
  • Source IP: Fix the connection server based on the client IP address
SSL certificateSelectionSelect the default encryption certificate and security level (TLS protocol can be configured when used)
  • Select the certificate to use for the client and SSL/TLS Handshake
    • Default certificate (required): Choose from certificates registered in the Certificate Manager service
    • SSL security level (required): Choose the security level when encrypting client connections (refer to SSL security level support items for the list of TLS versions and Cipher Suites per level)
      • High: Supports Cipher Suites of TLS 1.3 version
      • Medium: Supports Cipher Suites including TLS 1.2 version
Server SSL security levelRequiredWhen configuring End-to-End SSL, select the security level (available when using the TLS protocol)
  • LB - If communication between servers is not encrypted, select Do not use
Table. Enter Listener service information - when using L4 Load Balancer
  1. In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category
Required status
Detailed description
ExplanationSelectEnter resource description
tagSelectionAdd tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. Listener additional information input items
  1. Check the created service information and click the Create button.
    • After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Load Balancer Details page’s Connected Resources tab.

Creating a Listener in L7 Load Balancer

To create a Listener in the L7 Load Balancer, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. 2. Navigate to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource to create a Listener. 3. Go to the Load Balancer Details page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. 4. Go to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Create Listener button in the upper right.
  6. In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
    • According to the Protocol, the information that can be entered varies.
Category
Required status
Detailed description
Load BalancerRequiredLoad Balancer resource name where the Listener is created
Listener nameRequiredListener resource name
ProtocolRequiredSelect Listener receiving protocol
  • HTTP, HTTPS choose between
Service portRequiredListener receive port input
  • Enter a value between 1 and 65,534
Routing Rules > Routing ActionRequiredSelect routing processing method
  • LB server group forwarding: Forward traffic to the LB server group
  • URL redirection: LB sends a redirection response to the client
Routing Rules > Routing ConditionsRequiredWhen the routing action is LB server group forwarding, configure the LB server group per routing condition
  • URL path: Configure the LB server group per URL path
  • Host header: Set the LB server group based on the Host value
  • Redirect target: When the routing action is URL redirection, configure the redirect response
    • URL: Enter redirect URL information (full URL including scheme required)
    • Protocol/Port: Enter redirect protocol and port information (configurable when the Listener protocol is HTTP)
persistenceSelectSelect session persistence (Sticky Session) method (available when the routing action is LB server group forwarding)
  • Source IP: Fixed connection server based on client IP address
  • Cookie: Fixed connection server based on the cookie inserted by the Load Balancer
Listener timeout setting > Session keep-alive timeSelectSession idle-timeout setting
  • Use when enabled, input can be set between 60 and 3,600 seconds
  • Use → Not use: since it cannot be modified, it is recommended to use it selectively for required services
Listener timeout setting > HTTP connection timeoutSelectClient connection keep-alive time, response timeout setting
  • used when input possible between 1 and 120 seconds
  • enabled → disabled; since it cannot be modified, it is recommended to use it only for services that require it
X-Forwarded-ForSelectSet whether to insert client IP information
  • when used, add client IP address to X-Forwarded-For header
X-Forwarded-ProtoSelectionSet whether to insert client request protocol information
  • used when adding the client request protocol to the X-Forwarded-Proto header
X-Forwarded-PortSelectionSet insertion of client request port information
  • Use when adding the client request port to the X-Forwarded-Port header
HTTP 2.0SelectionConfigure HTTP/2 usage when connecting client and server
  • use when enabled, includes HTTP/2 and also supports lower versions
SSL certificateSelectionSelect encrypted certificate and security level (configurable when the Listener protocol is HTTPS)
  • Select the certificate to use for the client SSL/TLS handshake
    • Default certificate (required): Choose from certificates registered in the Certificate Manager service
    • SSL security level (required): Select the security level when encrypting client connections (refer to SSL security level support items for TLS version and Cipher Suite lists by security level)
      • High: Supports Cipher Suites of TLS 1.3 version
      • Medium: Supports Cipher Suites including TLS 1.2 version
  • If a multi-domain service is required, add domain-specific certificates to the SNI certificate item after creating the Listener
Server SSL security levelRequiredSelect security level when configuring End-to-End SSL (available when the Listener protocol is HTTPS)
  • LB - Select Not used when communication between servers is not encrypted
Table. Enter Listener service information - when using L7 Load Balancer
Reference

Among routing conditions, the URL path matching method is start-with(prefix match).

  • If the starting string of the HTTP Request header Path matches the routing condition’s requested URL path, the corresponding routing rule is applied.
  • Example: Request URL Path when entered as /api,
    • Matching cases: /api/users, /api/v1/login, /api/images/logo.png
    • When not matched: /auth/api/, /API/users
  1. In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category
required status
Detailed description
ExplanationSelectionEnter resource description
tagSelectionAdd tags
  • Maximum of 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. Listener additional information input fields
  1. Verify the created service information and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resources on the Load Balancer Details page’s Connected Resources tab.

Supported Items by SSL Security Level

The list of TLS versions and Cipher Suites supported by the Listener for each SSL security level is as follows.

Security levelTLS versionCipher Suite (encryption algorithm)
HighTLS 1.3TLS13_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
TLS13_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
TLS13_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
Normal/LowNormal: TLS 1.3, 1.2
Low: TLS 1.3, 1.2, 1.1
TLS13_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
TLS13_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
TLS13_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
RC4-MD5
RC4-SHA
DES-CBC3-SHA
DHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
DHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
DHE-RSA-CHACHA20-PLY1305
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA
ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA384
ECDHE-RSA-CHACHA20-POLY135
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA384
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256
ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384
ECDHE-ECDSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305
Table. Supported items by SSL security level

Check Listener detailed information

On the Load Balancer Details page, you can select the Listener in the Connected Resources tab to view and edit its detailed information.

To view detailed information about the Listener, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. 2. Go to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Load Balancer Details page.
  4. Click the Connected Resources tab on the Load Balancer Details page.
  5. Click the Listener to view detailed information in the list of connected resources. 5. Navigate to the Listener Details page.
    • Listener Details The page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of the Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
CategoryDetailed description
statusListener 상태
  • Active: the service is properly activated
  • Deleting: processing a service termination request
  • Creating: processing a service creation request
  • Error: cannot determine the current status due to an internal error
  • Editing: processing a service modification request
Delete ListenerDelete Listener
Table. Listener status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

Detailed Information tab allows you to view the Listener’s detailed information and edit necessary details. Detailed information varies depending on the Load Balancer in use.

L4 Load Balancer Detailed Information

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorListener creation request user
Creation Date/TimeListener creation time
ModifierUser requesting listener modification
Modification dateListener modification timestamp
Listener nameListener name
ProtocolListener usage protocol
PortListener port
Session keep-alive timeTCP session idle-timeout information
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
Proxy ProtocolWhether to insert proxy protocol header
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
persistenceSession stickiness (Sticky Session) status
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
Routing rulesRouting action and routing condition information
  • Click the Edit icon to modify the LB server group
SSL certificateDefault certificate and SSL security level, expiration date and time information
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
  • If a registered SNI certificate exists, the default certificate cannot be edited (editable after deleting the SNI certificate)
SNI certificateSNI certificate details
  • Click the Edit icon to add and reference SNI information and certificates
Server SSL security levelServer connection encryption status
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
ExplanationAdditional information about the Listener
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
Table. Listener Details Tab - When Using L4 Load Balancer

L7 Load Balancer Detailed Information

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorListener creation request user
Creation Date/TimeListener creation time
ModifierUser requesting listener modification
Modification date and timeListener modification timestamp
Listener nameListener name
ProtocolListener usage protocol
PortListener port
Session keep-alive timeTCP session idle timeout information
  • Edit Click the icon to change from unused → used and modify the input value
Client connection keep-alive timeHTTP client connection keep-alive time
  • Edit Click the icon to change from unused → used and modify the input value
Server response latencyHTTP server response latency
  • Edit Click the icon to change from unused → used and modify the input value
X-Forwarded-ForInsert X-Forwarded-For header
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
X-Forwarded-ProtoX-Forwarded-Proto header insertion option
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
X-Forwarded-PortX-Forwarded-Port header insertion option
  • Edit Click the edit icon to modify
persistenceSticky Session setting
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
HTTP 2.0HTTP/2 usage
  • Click the Edit icon to modify
Routing rulesRouting action and routing condition settings
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify routing condition or redirection target
SSL certificateDefault certificate and SSL security level, expiration date and time information
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify
  • If a registered SNI certificate exists, the default certificate cannot be modified (modification possible after deleting the SNI certificate)
SNI certificateSNI certificate details
  • Edit Click the icon to add and reference SNI information and certificates
Server SSL security levelWhether the server connection is encrypted
  • Edit click the icon to edit
Add response headerHTTP Response header insertion
  • Edit icon can be clicked to set
ExplanationAdditional information about the Listener
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
Table. Listener Details Tab - When Using L7 Load Balancer

Tag

You can view, add, modify, or delete a Listener’s tag information.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of a tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Listener tag tab item

Job History

You can view the Listener’s operation history.

CategoryDetailed description
Work historyTask execution details
Work date and timeTask execution date and time
Resource TypeResource Type
Resource nameListener name
Task resultTask execution result (success/failure)
Operator InformationUser information of the person who performed the task
Table. Listener Work History Tab Items

Modify routing rules

On the Load Balancer Details page, you can modify the Listener’s routing rules in the Connected Resources tab.

To modify the Listener’s routing rules, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Load Balancer.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. 2. Load Balancer List navigate to the page.
  3. On the Load Balancer list page, click the resource whose detailed information you want to view. 3. Go to the Load Balancer Details page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Connected Resources tab.
  5. In the list of connected resources, click the Listener to modify the routing condition. 5. Go to the Listener Details page.
  6. On the Listener Details page, click the Edit icon for the Routing Rules item. 6. Routing Rule Modification popup opens.
  7. After modifying the routing rule according to the routing action, click the Confirm button.
    Category
    Required status
    Detailed description
    Routing action-Current routing method (cannot be modified)
    Routing conditionRequiredIf the routing action is LB server group forwarding, you can modify the sub-settings of the routing condition
    • URL path: Modify request URL path and LB server group (up to 20 additions possible)
    • host header: Modify request host and LB server group (up to 20 additions possible)
    Redirect targetRequiredIf the routing action is URL redirection, the redirection target can be modified
    • URL: modify redirection URL
    • Protocol/Port: modify redirection port
    Table. Listener routing rule modification items

Add or modify response header

On the Load Balancer Details page, you can modify the addition of response headers for the Listener in the Connected Resources tab.

To modify the Listener’s response header addition, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu, click it. 1. Go to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. 2. Navigate to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. Load Balancer List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Load Balancer Details page.
  4. Click the Connected Resources tab on the Load Balancer Details page.
  5. Click the Listener to edit the response header addition in the list of connected resources. 5. Navigate to the Listener Details page.
  6. On the Listener Details page, click the Edit icon of the Add Response Header item. 6. Response Header Add/Edit The popup window opens.
  7. After setting the header to insert, click the Confirm button.
    Category
    required status
    Detailed description
    HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) headerSelectSelect whether to insert the HSTS header (enforce HTTPS connections to enhance security)
    • When enabled, set max-age and subdomain applicability
      • max-age: Enter a value between 1 and 63072000 (up to 2 years)
      • Subdomain applicability: enabled applies to all subdomains
    Table. Response Header Add/Modify Items

Delete Listener

To delete an unused Listener, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. 2. Go to the Load Balancer List page.
  3. On the Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource from which you want to delete the Listener. 3. Navigate to the Load Balancer Details page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. 4. Go to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Listener you want to delete. 5. Go to the Listener Details page.
  6. On the Listener Details page, click the Delete Listener button.

Terminate Load Balancer

You can terminate unused Load Balancers to reduce costs. However, because it may impact the application service, please request termination only after a thorough prior review.

Caution

In the following cases, the Load Balancer cannot be terminated.

  • If there is a Listener attached to the Load Balancer: Delete the attached Listener on the Load Balancer Details page under the Connected Resources tab.
  • If you are using a Public NAT IP with the Load Balancer: Load Balancer details page’s Detailed Information tab, deselect the Public NAT IP in use.
  • If you are using a Private NAT IP with a Load Balancer: In the Load Balancer Details page’s Details tab, deselect the Private NAT IP in use.
  • If there are rules registered in the Firewall: Delete the Firewall’s rules in use from the Load Balancer Details page’s Detailed Information tab.
  • If connected to a PrivateLink Service: Check the connected Load Balancer on the PrivateLink Service Details page.

To cancel the Load Balancer, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer click the menu. 1. Go to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. 2. Go to the Load Balancer list page.
  3. Load Balancer List page, click the resource to terminate. 3. Go to the Load Balancer Details page.
  4. On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
  5. After termination is complete, verify the resource termination status in the Load Balancer list.

3.2.1 - LB server group

Users can create an LB server group through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and connect it to a Load Balancer’s Listener.

Create LB server group

Reference
You can create up to 1,000 LB server groups per account.

Follow these steps to create an LB server group.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. 2. Go to the LB server group list page.
  3. Click the Create LB Server Group button on the LB Server Group List page. 3. Go to the Create LB Server Group page.
  4. On the Create LB Server Group page, enter the information required to create a service and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      LB server group nameRequiredLB server group resource name
      • using English uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, special characters(-_) to enter 3 ~ 63 characters
      • LB server group name must be unique within the Account
      VPC nameRequiredSelect the VPC to create the LB server group
      • Select the VPC where the Load Balancer that will connect to the LB server group is created
      Service Subnet nameRequiredSelect the VPC Subnet to create the LB server group
      • Select the Subnet where the Load Balancer that will connect to the LB server group is created
      Load balancingRequiredLoad Balancing Algorithm Selection
      • Round Robin: Distribute sequentially among registered members
      • Weighted round robin: Distribute sequentially in proportion to the weight assigned to each member
      • Least Connection: Distribute to the member with the fewest connections
      • Weighted least connection: Distribute to the higher‑priority member considering each member’s weight and connection count
      • Source IP/Port Hash: Distribute to a specific member based on the client IP address and port hash value
      • Source IP Hash: Distribute to a specific member based on the source IP address hash value
      ProtocolRequiredSelect the receiving protocol for the LB server group
      • Select the protocol to forward to members of the LB server group
      LB health checkRequiredSelect LB health check
      • Select an LB health check created in the Service Subnet that is the same as the LB server group
      Table. LB server group service information input fields
    • Additional Information Input in this area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      ExplanationSelectionEnter resource description
      tagSelectionAdd tags
      • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
      Table. LB server group additional information input fields
  5. Review the created service information and the estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, verify the created resources on the LB server group list page.

Check detailed information of LB server group

In the LB Server Group menu, you can view and edit the resource list and detailed information. LB Server Group Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To view detailed information of the LB server group, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. 2. Go to the LB server group list page.

    • You can modify column visibility by clicking the Settings button at the top right of the table.
      Category
      display status
      Detailed description
      LB server group namedefaultLB server group resource name
      ProtocoldefaultLB server group protocol
      Load Balancer namedefaultLoad Balancer resource name connected to the LB server group
      LB health check IDdefaultThe name of the LB health check resource used by the LB server group
      Number of membersdefaultNumber of members registered in the LB server group
      Creation date and timedefaultLB server group creation timestamp
      statusdefaultLB server group resource status
      Table. LB server group list items
  3. LB server group list Click the resource to view its detailed information on the page. 3. Navigate to the LB Server Group Details page.

    • LB Server Group Details page displays status information and descriptions of additional features at the top.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusLB server group resource status
      • Active: The service is active and functioning normally
      • Deleting: Processing service termination request
      • Creating: Processing service creation request
      • Error: Unable to determine current status due to an internal error
        • If this status persists, contact the Support Center
      • Editing: Processing service modification request
      Delete LB server groupDelete LB server group resources
      Table. LB server group status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

Detailed Information tab allows you to view detailed information of resources from the LB server group list, and modify the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceservice name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNResource unique ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser requesting service creation
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
ModifierService Modification Request User
Modification date and timeService modification date and time
Load Balancer nameLoad Balancer resource name linked to the LB server group
  • resource name when clicked navigates to the detail page
LB server group nameLB server group name
VPC nameVPC where the LB server group is created resource name
  • resource name click to go to the detail page
Service Subnet nameSubnet where the LB server group is created resource name
  • When clicking the resource name, go to the detail page
ProtocolLB server group forwarding protocol
Load balancingLB server group traffic distribution method
  • Click the Edit icon to modify
LB health checkLB health check resource name
  • Edit icon can be clicked to modify
Member status by Availability ZoneSummary of member count and health check status by Availability Zone
ExplanationAdd description for LB server group
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
Table. LB server group detailed information tab items

Connected resource

Connected Resources tab allows you to view the list of members connected to the LB Server Group, and add or delete members.

CategoryDetailed description
Add memberAdd LB server group member button
Member nameMember name (server name) added to the LB server group
  • Click the member name to go to the detail page
  • Click the Edit icon to modify
IP addressMember IP address
PortMember receive port
WeightLoad balancing weight
  • Default 1
  • In an LB server group, when using weighted load balancing (Weighted Round Robin, Weighted Least Connection), values from 1 to 1000 can be entered
ActivationMember activation status
  • Enable: Receiving client requests
  • Disable: Excluded from receiving client requests
Creation date and timeMember addition time
Availability ZoneInformation about the Availability Zone where the member (server) was created
Health check statusHealth check status information
  • Healthy: Health check is normal
  • Unhealthy: Health check is abnormal
  • Unknown: Health check status cannot be determined
statusMember resource status
DeleteDelete member
Table. Items in the resource list connected to the LB server group

Tag

On the LB Server Group List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. LB server group tag tab items

Job History

Job History tab allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Work logTask execution details
Task date and timeTask execution date and time
Resource TypeResource Type
Resource nameLB server group name
ResultTask execution result (success/failure)
Operator InformationUser information of the person who performed the task
Table. LB server group operation history list items

Managing LB Server Group Resources

You can view the member list of an LB server group and add or remove members.

Add member

You can add members to the LB server group to register server resources that handle client requests.

To add a member to the LB server group, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. 2. Go to the LB server group list page.

  3. On the LB server group list page, click the resource to edit its details. 3. Navigate to the LB Server Group Details page.

  4. On the LB Server Group Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. 4. Go to the Connected Resources tab page.

  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Add Member button at the top right.

  6. In the Add Member popup, after entering the required information, click the Confirm button.

    Category
    required status
    Detailed description
    LB server group namedefaultLB server group name to add a member
    Target serverRequiredServer information to add as a member
    • Virtual Server/Bare Metal Server/Multi-Node GPU Cluster: Select from the list of resources created in the same VPC as the LB server group
    • Enter IP directly: Enter the server IP directly
    • Click the Add button to add the target server
    Member InformationRequiredMember Port and Weight Settings
    • Member Name: Display the server name and IP to be added as a member
    • Port: The port the member will receive
    • Weight: The weight applied for load balancing
      • When using Weighted Round Robin or Weighted Least Connection load balancing, a value between 1 and 1000 must be entered
    Table. Add LB server group member item

  7. Click the OK button in the alert dialog.

  8. Check if members have been added in the Connected Resources tab.

Notice

Add the following rule to the Security Group of the server added as a member to enable communication between the Load Balancer and LB server group members.

  • (Direction) Inbound rule, (Target address) Load Balancer’s Source NAT IP, (Protocol) LB server group protocol, (Allowed port) member port
Reference
  • If the LB server group is in Creating, Editing, Deleting, Error state, you cannot add members.
  • If the Account that the LB server group belongs to has exceeded its allowable number of members, you cannot add additional members. * The maximum number of members that can be created in a single Account is 1,000.
Reference
  • You can add servers created in another VPC as members via VPC Peering. * After adding the target server by direct IP entry, check the Health Check Status of the added member in the Connected Resources tab.
    For detailed information, refer to VPC > VPC Peering.

Edit member

When you click a member name in the member list, you go to the Member Details page. You can view member details, and click the Edit icon to change the information.

Follow these steps to edit member details.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. 2. Go to the LB server group list page.
  3. On the LB server group list page, click the resource you want to edit details for. 3. Navigate to the LB Server Group Details page.
  4. On the LB Server Group Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. 4. Navigate to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the member to edit. 5. Navigate to the Member Details page.
  6. Edit the desired member information on the Member Details page.

Weight modification

If you use weighted load balancing (Weighted Round Robin, Weighted Least Connection), you can modify it.

  • Click the Edit icon of the Weight item. * Enter the weight to modify in the edit window and click the Confirm button.

Port modification

To edit a member port, click the Edit icon in the Port field. Enter the port to modify in the edit window and click the Confirm button.

Activate edit

To edit member activation, click the Activate Edit icon. Set the activation status in the edit window and click the Confirm button.

Reference
If you modify the activation to Disable, the member will only process existing connections and will stop new connections.

Delete member

Reference
If the LB server group is in Creating, Editing, Deleting, Error state, members cannot be deleted.

To delete unused members, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. 2. Go to the LB server group list page.
  3. On the LB server group list page, click the resource to edit its details. 3. Navigate to the LB Server Group Details page.
  4. On the LB Server Group Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. 4. Go to the Connected Resources tab page.
  5. On the Connected Resources tab page, click the member to delete. 5. Navigate to the Member Details page.
  6. On the Member Details page, click the Delete Member button.
  7. Check the member deletion status in the Linked Resources tab.

Terminate LB server group

You can terminate LB server groups that are not being used. However, because it may impact the application service, please request termination only after a thorough prior review.

Notice

The LB server group cannot be terminated in the following case.

  • If the LB server group is being used in a Listener: modify the Listener’s LB server group before deleting the LB server group.
  • If there are members registered in the LB server group: Delete all resources connected to the LB server group before terminating the LB server group.
  • When using an LB server group in an Auto-Scaling Group: Set the Load Balancer to disabled in the Auto-Scaling Group or modify it so that the LB server group is not used. * For more details, refer to Auto-Scaling Group > Load Balancer 사용.

To cancel the LB server group, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. 2. Go to the LB server group list page.
  3. Click the resource to be terminated from the LB server group list. 3. Navigate to the LB Server Group Details page.
  4. On the LB Server Group Details page, click the Delete LB Server Group button.
  5. After termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the LB server group list.

3.2.2 - LB health check

Users can create an LB health check through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and use it for an LB server group.

Create LB health check

Reference
You can create up to 500 LB health checks per account.

To create an LB health check, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Load Balancer.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. 2. LB health check list Navigate to the page.
  3. On the LB Health Check List page, click the Create LB Health Check button. 3. Go to the LB Health Check Creation page.
  4. On the Create LB health check page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      LB health check nameRequiredLB health check resource name
      • Enter using English uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-_) with a length of 3 to 63 characters
      • LB health check name must be unique within the Account
      VPC nameRequiredSelect the VPC to create the LB health check
      • Select the VPC where the LB server group that will use the LB health check is created
      Service Subnet nameRequiredSelect the VPC Subnet to create the LB health check
      • Select the Service Subnet where the LB server group that will use the LB health check is created
      Health check method > ProtocolRequiredSelect TCP or HTTP as the protocol to use for member health checks.
      Health check method > Health check port필수멤버 헬스 체크에 사용할 포트로 멤버 포트, 직접 입력 중 선택
      • 직접 입력 시 1 ~ 65,534 사이의 값 입력
      헬스 체크 방식 > 주기필수헬스 체크 주기
      • 기본값 5초, 1 ~ 180초 내에서 입력 가능
      Health check method > waiting timeRequiredHealth check response timeout
      • Default is 5 seconds, input allowed between 1 and 180 seconds
      • Cannot be set to a value larger than the interval
      Health check method > Detection countRequiredNumber of times to evaluate health check status
      • Default is 3 times, input can be between 1 and 10
      Health check method > HTTP methodRequiredHTTP request method setting (HTTP protocol usage setting)
      • choose GET or POST
      Health check method > URL monitorrequiredEnter health check URL path (HTTP protocol when used)
      • Enter using English letters, numbers, and special characters (/.-_?&=) within 50 characters
      Health check method > response codeRequiredEnter the HTTP response code to receive from the server (HTTP protocol setting when used)
      • Enter response codes in the 200 ~ 500 range
      Health check method > request stringRequiredHealth check request string input (HTTP protocol POST method used)
      • Enter the content to include in the Request Body using English letters, numbers, and special characters (/.-_?&=) within 255 bytes
      Table. LB health check service information input items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      ExplanationSelectEnter resource description
      tagSelectAdd tag
      • Maximum of 50 tags can be added per resource
      Table. LB server group additional information input fields
  5. Summary Check the service information and estimated billing amount created in the panel, and click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the LB Health Check List page.
information

Add the following rule to the Security Group of the server added as a member for member health checks in the Load Balancer.

  • (Direction) Inbound rule, (Target address) Load Balancer’s health check IP, (Protocol) health check protocol, (Allowed port) health check port
Information

Set the LB health check to a value that members added to the LB server group can respond to.

  • Since the Load Balancer determines member status based on health check responses, the LB health check results may differ from the actual service status.

View detailed LB health check information

LB health check menu allows you to view and edit the resource list and detailed information. LB health check details page consists of Details, Connected resources, Tags, Operation history tabs.

Follow these steps to view detailed LB health check information.

  1. All Services > Networking > Load Balancer Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. 2. Go to the LB health check list page.

    • Column visibility can be modified by clicking the Settings button at the top right of the table.
      Category
      display status
      Detailed description
      LB health check namebasicLB health check resource name
      Service Subnet IDbasicVPC Subnet name where the LB health check was created
      Number of LB server groupsbasicNumber of LB server groups using LB health check
      typebasicLB health check type
      ProtocolbasicLB health check protocol
      Creation timestampbasicLB health check creation time
      statusbasicLB health check resource status
      Table. LB health check list items
  3. LB Health Check List Click the resource to view detailed information on the page. 3. LB Health Check Details navigate to the page.

    • LB Health Check Details At the top of the page, status information and descriptions of additional features are displayed.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusLB health check resource status
      • Active: The service is active and functioning normally
      • Deleting: Processing service termination request
      • Creating: Processing service creation request
      • Error: Unable to determine current status due to an internal error
        • If this status persists, contact the Support Center
      • Editing: Processing service modification request
      Delete LB health checkDelete LB health check resource
      Table. LB health check status information and additional feature items

Detailed Information

Detailed Information tab allows you to view the resource’s detailed information from the LB health check list, and edit the information when necessary.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorService creation request user
Creation timestampService creation date and time
ModifierUser requesting service modification
Modification date and timeService modification date and time
LB health check nameLB health check name
typeLB health check type
VPC nameVPC to use for LB health check
  • Click the resource name to go to the detail page
Service Subnet nameVPC Subnet to use for LB health check
  • Click the resource name to go to the detail page
Health check methodLB health check method configuration information
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
ExplanationAdditional information about LB health check
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
Table. LB health check detailed information tab items

Connected resource

Connected Resources tab allows you to view detailed information of the LB server group linked to LB Health Check.

CategoryDetailed description
LB server group nameLB server group resource name
  • when you click the resource name LB server group navigate to the detail page
ProtocolLB health check protocol
Load Balancer nameLoad Balancer resource name linked to the LB server group
Number of membersNumber of members added to the LB server group
Creation Date/TimeLB server group creation time
statusLB 서버 그룹 자원 상태
  • Active: The service is active and functioning normally
  • Deleting: Processing service termination request
  • Creating: Processing service creation request
  • Error: Unable to determine current status due to an internal error
    • If this status persists, contact the Support Center
  • Editing: Processing service modification request
Table. LB health check connected resource list items

Tag

LB Health Check List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search the existing list of created Keys and Values and select
Table. LB health check tag tab items

Job History

Task History tab allows you to view the task history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Work HistoryTask execution details
Work date and timeTask execution date and time
Resource TypeResource Type
Resource nameLB health check name
Task resultTask execution result (success/failure)
Operator InformationUser information of the person who performed the operation
Table. LB health check job history list items

Modify LB health check method

On the LB Health Check Details page, you can modify the health check method.

To modify the LB health check method, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. 1. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. 2. Navigate to the LB health check list page.
  3. On the LB Health Check List page, click the resource to edit its detailed information. 3. LB Health Check Details navigate to the page.
  4. LB Health Check Details page, click the Edit icon of the Health Check Method. 4. Modify Health Check Method Proceed to the popup window.
  5. Health Check Method Modification After editing the required information in the popup window, click the Confirm button.

Cancel LB health check

You can cancel the LB health check service that you are not using.

Caution
  • default type LB health check resources cannot be deleted.
  • LB health check resources used in the LB server group cannot be deleted.

To disable the LB health check, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Load Balancer.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. 2. Go to the LB health check list page.
  3. From the LB health check list, click the resource to terminate. 3. Go to the LB Health Check Details page.
  4. On the LB Health Check Details page, click the Delete LB Health Check button.
  5. When the termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the LB health check list.

3.3 - API Reference

API Reference

3.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

3.5 - Release Note

Load Balancer

2026.07.16
FEATURE Load Balancer feature addition
  • Supports Multi-AZ configuration, allowing you to select the Availability Zone for creating a Load Balancer. * (SCP for Samsung KR-WEST1 target)
2026.07.16
CHANGED LB server group options and features added
  • The Source IP Hash option has been added to load balancing. * (The existing IP Hash option is displayed as Source IP/Port Hash and provides the same functionality.)
  • You can view the member status by Availability Zone.
2026.03.19
FEATURE Add Load Balancer feature
  • A feature has been added to allow setting a Private NAT IP on the Service IP.
  • The ‘TCP_PROXY’ protocol has been added to the L4 Listener.
2026.03.19
CHANGED Load Balancer feature change
  • The conditions for creating L4 Listener service ports have been changed.
    • It has been changed to allow creating a Listener on the same service port for both TCP and UDP protocols.
  • The method for entering L7 Listener routing rules has been changed.
    • LB server group forwarding > Updated to allow users to add ‘/’ path in the URL path.
    • LB server group forwarding > The matching method for the entered path in the URL path has changed from ‘Contains (including match)’ to ‘Starts with (starting part match)’.
    • LB server group forwarding > A ‘Default(Default)’ condition has been added to the request host of the host header.
2025.12.16
FEATURE LB health check setting change and addition of LB health check, LB server group options
  • The LB health check port configuration method has been changed.
    • You can select between member port and manual entry, and for manual entry, specify the port to use.
    • The existing LB health check will be changed to the member port. * (Same as the current health check method)
  • The HTTPS option has been added to the LB health check protocol.
    • You can monitor the server TLS connection status.
  • When using URL redirection in the HTTP Listener, you can specify the target port for the redirection.
  • You can add Multi-node GPU Cluster resources to an LB server group member.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Add Load Balancer feature
  • When creating a Load Balancer, you can set the Source NAT IP and the health check IP.
  • TLS protocol has been added to the L4 Listener.
    • You can configure a TLS service based on TCP.
  • A routing rule option has been added to the L7 Listener.
    • Routing conditions allow you to configure branching by URL path or by host.
  • Supports multiple SSL certificates.
    • By supporting SNI, you can register multiple certificates on a single Listener.
2025.07.01
FEATURE LB health check and LB server group feature addition
  • Add LB health check management feature
    • You can create an LB health check to define the required health check method and attach it to an LB server group for use.
  • Support for weighted load balancing of LB server groups
    • Weighted Round Robin and Weighted Least Connection have been added to the load balancing options.
    • You can set per-member weights to distribute server load.
  • Add LB server group member activation feature
    • You can enable or disable members of the LB server group to select their activation status.
2025.02.27
NEW New Load Balancer Service Launch
  • A more reliable and feature‑rich Load Balancer service has been released.
  • Provides an L7 Load Balancer that supports HTTP and HTTPS protocols. TCP, UDP 프로토콜을 지원하는 L4 Load Balancer를 제공합니다.

4 - DNS

4.1 - Overview

Service Overview

The DNS service converts domain names, which are convenient for humans to recognize, into numeric IP addresses that the system can identify, allowing access to services.
With the DNS service, users can easily register the desired domain and manage its DNS records themselves.

Features

  • Easy Domain Registration: You can register and modify new domains via a web-based console. Without building separate DNS infrastructure or installing DNS solutions, you can easily create and manage domains through the web.
  • Support for Various Records: You can configure various resource record types such as A, AAAA, CNAME, TXT, MX, SPF, and it automatically scales to handle large query volumes without user intervention.
  • Convenient Hosting Environment Management: You can select and use a Public domain name, which is exposed to the Internet to provide web services, or a Private domain name, which is accessible only to designated internal users without an Internet connection, according to your usage environment and purpose.

Configuration diagram

Diagram
Figure. DNS Diagram

Provided features

The DNS service provides the following functions.

  • Hosting Zone Creation/Management: You can create and manage Public Hosted Zones that are accessible from anywhere via the Internet, and Private Hosted Zones that are not exposed to the Internet and are only accessible within a designated network environment.
  • Public Domain Name Application: You can apply for a Public Domain Name that can be accessed from anywhere via the Internet.
  • Support for various resource records: You can select and use record types that suit your environment and purpose.
Record typeDetailed description
ASpecify the IPv4 address corresponding to the domain name so that the IP address can be resolved from the domain name.
AAAASpecify the IPv6 address corresponding to the domain name so that the IP address can be resolved from the domain name.
TXTSet text information for the domain
CNAMEAssign an alias for the domain name
MXSpecify the mail server for the user’s domain and subdomains
SPFTo prevent spam mail, verify the sending mail server’s IP address or domain name, etc. (Sender Policy Framework)
NSName server responsible for this domain (auto-generated)
SOADefine the domain’s initial information (the starting point of authority) (auto-generated)

Component

Private DNS

To manage private domain names for use only within a designated network environment without exposing them to the internet, you must first create a Private DNS. The Private DNS name is used uniformly across all regions within the account. It can be initially created in any region of the account, and later it can be activated in other regions using the same Private DNS name from the Private DNS list. You can select the VPC to connect to Private DNS for each region. By using a common Private DNS name, you can share and manage the Private Hosted Zone information across all regions.

Hosted Zone

Private Hosted Zone allows you to create and manage domain names that can be used only in the network environment designated for VPCs connected to Private DNS. A Public Hosted Zone can manage the public domain name created through the Samsung Cloud Platform. Through a Hosted Zone, you can create and edit records that match your intended use.

Public Domain Name

You can apply for a Public Domain Name in partnership with Whois, the public domain name management provider. Public Domain Name can be purchased in one-year increments, and you can set or change the automatic renewal (in one-year increments) up to 7 days before the expiration date.

Constraints

The constraints of the DNS service are as follows.

Categorydescription
Number of Private DNS that can be created per account1
Number of Hosted Zones that can be created in an Account20
Number of records that can be registered per Hosted Zone100
Reference
  • Requests to use Public Domain Name and Public Hosted Zone in the Korea South (kr-south) region are restricted.

Preceding Service

The DNS service has no prerequisite services.

4.1.1 - TLD List

TLD (Top-Level Domain) list

The following TLDs are available. When applying for a Public Domain Name, an annual fee is incurred that varies by TLD type.

TLD typePublic Domain Name registration fee (KRW/year, VAT excluded)
.COM20,000
.NET20,000
.ORG20,000
.KR24,000
.PE.KR16,000
.BIZ20,000
.INFO20,000
.CN65,000
.TV90,000
.IN65,000
.EU80,000
.AC286,000
.TW100,000
.MOBI44,000
.NAME30,000
.CC90,000
.JP198,000
.ASIA55,000
.ME44,000
.TEL44,000
.PRO44,000
.SO103,000
.SX90,000
.CO100,000
.XXX200,000
.PW44,000
.PH100,000
.io91,000
.app42,500
.co.kr24,000

4.1.2 - ServiceWatch Metrics

DNS sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.

Reference
Refer to the ServiceWatch guide for how to view metrics in ServiceWatch.

Basic Metrics

The following are the basic metrics for the Private DNS namespace.

The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the key indicators selected from the basic indicators provided by Private DNS. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built for each service in ServiceWatch.

Each metric indicates, via the user guide, which statistical values are meaningful when viewing that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the values shown in bold are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, you can view key metrics using these primary statistical values.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunitMeaningful statistics
privatedns.operation.per_secNumber of UDP-based data requests processed per second on user requestCount/Second
  • Average
  • Total
privatedns.query.outbound.per_secNumber of requests per second sent to external DNS servers for user queriesCount/Second
  • Total
  • Average
privatedns.query.answers_slowNumber of requests sent to external DNS servers for user queries with slow responses (within 1 second)Count/Second
  • Total
  • Average
privatedns.response.nxdomain.per_secNumber of NXDOMAIN responses received per second from external DNS servers for user queriesCount/Second
  • Maximum
  • Total
  • Average
privatedns.response.servfail.per_secNumber of SERVFAIL responses received per second from external DNS servers for user queriesCount/Second
  • Average
  • Total
Table. DNS Basic Metrics

4.2 - How-to guides

The user explains the items to verify before creating a DNS service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Preface before Using Private Domain Name Management

Before using Private Domain Name management, first verify the following items.

  1. To manage private domain names for use only within a designated network environment without exposing them to the internet, you must first create a Private DNS.
  2. The defined Private DNS name is used uniformly across all regions within the account. It can be initially created in any region within the account, and thereafter, in other regions, it is activated and used from the Private DNS list with the same Private DNS name.
  3. You can optionally configure the VPCs you want to connect to Private DNS for each region. When first created or activated, no VPC is connected.
  4. The Private DNS name may already be in use within the Samsung Cloud Platform, and you can verify its availability by performing a duplicate check when entering the domain name.
  5. Hosted Zone information is shared across all regions. However, some detailed information (SRN, creator, modifier information) can only be viewed in the region where it was originally created.

General usage examples are shown below. For detailed usage instructions, refer to the How-to guides of the respective subservice.

OrderSubserviceKey procedures
STEP 1Private DNSCreate Private DNS (Region A) → Connect VPC in Region A → Activate Private DNS (Region B) → Connect VPC in Region B
STEP 2Hosted ZoneCreate Private Hosted Zone → Register record
STEP 3-View detailed information, edit, and cancel
Table. Private Domain Name Management General Usage Procedure

Public Domain Name Management: Foreword Before Use

Before using Public Domain Name management, please check the following items first.

  1. Public Domain Names intended for use on the internet can be managed through a Hosted Zone only for domain names that have been registered via the Samsung Cloud Platform.
  2. The list of available top-level domains may change.

An example of the typical usage procedure is shown below. For detailed usage instructions, refer to the How-to guides of the respective subservice.

CategorySubserviceMain Procedure
STEP 1Public Domain NameVerify availability and apply for the Public Domain Name you wish to use
STEP 2Hosted ZoneCreate a Hosted Zone for the requested Public Domain Name → Register records
STEP 3-View detailed information, edit, cancel
Table. Public Domain Name Management General Usage Procedure

4.2.1 - Private DNS

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Private DNS service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Private DNS

You can create and use a Private DNS service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Reference
Only one Private DNS service can be created per account.

To request the creation of a Private DNS service, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > DNS Click the menu. Proceed to the Service Home page.
  2. Click the Private DNS Create button in the dropdown of the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Private DNS Create page.
  3. On the Private DNS Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Private DNS nameRequiredEnter the Private DNS name to use
      • Enter using 3 - 20 characters, including lowercase letters, numbers, and the special character (-)
      • Cannot be the same as an existing name in use
      VPC connectionSelectRegister VPC to connect with Private DNS
      • Click the Select button to choose a VPC
      • Up to 5 VPCs can be registered
      Table. Private DNS service information input items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      descriptionSelectionEnter additional information and description for Private DNS
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Private DNS additional information input fields
  4. Check the creation history and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Private DNS List page.

Check Private DNS detailed information

Private DNS service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Private DNS Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view the detailed information of Private DNS, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Private DNS menu. You will be taken to the Private DNS List page.
  3. On the Private DNS List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Private DNS Details page.
    • Private DNS Details page displays the status and detailed information of Private DNS, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Service statusPrivate DNS status
      • Creating: creating
      • Activing: activating
      • Active: active
      • Inactive: inactive
      • Editing: editing settings
      • Deleting: deleting
      • Error: error occurred
      Service terminationButton to disable Private DNS
      Table. Private DNS status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Private DNS List page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if necessary.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
EditorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Initial creation locationInitial creation location of Private DNS
VPC connectionVPC information connected to Private DNS
  • Edit icon can be clicked to change the VPC
  • Click the connected VPC name to navigate to the detail page
ExplanationPrivate DNS description
  • Edit Click the icon to edit the description
Table. Private DNS detailed information tab items

tag

Private DNS List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and to add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Private DNS tag tab items

Job History

Private DNS List page lets you view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • You can view operation details, operation time, resource type, resource name, operation result, and operator information
  • Operation History List When you click the corresponding resource in the list, the Operation History Details popup opens
Table. Private DNS operation history tab items

Activating Private DNS from a location other than its initial creation location

You can enable and use Private DNS in regions other than the region where it was originally created.

To enable the Private DNS service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Private DNS menu. You will be taken to the Private DNS List page.
  3. Click the More > Activate button of the resource you want to enable from the Private DNS list. A notification dialog will appear.
    • The activation button is displayed only for Private DNS entries with Inactive status.
  4. Click OK in the alert dialog.

Configure VPC connection for Private DNS

You can configure the VPC information connected to the Private DNS service.

To configure the VPC connection for Private DNS, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Go to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Private DNS menu. You will be taken to the Private DNS List page.
  3. On the Private DNS List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Private DNS Details page.
  4. On the Private DNS Details page, click the Edit icon of the VPC connection item. The VPC connection selection popup window opens.
  5. In the VPC connection selection popup window, select the VPC to connect and click OK.
  6. Check that the selected VPC is displayed in the VPC connection item.

Terminate Private DNS

You can request termination of the Private DNS service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Caution
If a Hosted Zone resource is attached to a Private DNS service, it cannot be terminated. To terminate the service, first delete the attached resource.

To request cancellation of the Private DNS service, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Private DNS menu. You will be taken to the Private DNS List page.
  3. On the Private DNS List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Private DNS Details page.
  4. On the Private DNS Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
  5. Once the termination is complete, check the service termination status in the Private DNS list.

4.2.2 - Hosted Zone

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Hosted Zone service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Hosted Zone

You can create and use the Hosted Zone service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the creation of a Hosted Zone service, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > DNS menu, click it. You will be taken to the Service Home page.

  2. Click the Create Hosted Zone button in the dropdown of the Service Home page. Proceed to the Create Hosted Zone page.

  3. Create Hosted Zone page, enter the information needed to create the service, and choose detailed options.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Usage classificationRequiredSelect a domain appropriate for the purpose of the Hosted Zone
      • Private: Domain that can be used only within the Samsung Cloud Platform
      • Public: Domain that can be accessed from outside (the Internet)
      Private DNS name to registerRequiredSelect from the pre-created Private DNS
      • Selectable only when Private is chosen in the usage classification
      Hosted Zone name to registerRequiredEnter the Hosted Zone name to use
      • Enter using lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens (-), within 2 to 63 characters
      • When applying for a new domain, click the Check Availability button to verify duplication
      Table. Hosted Zone service information input items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      ExplanationSelectEnter additional information and description for the Hosted Zone
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
      Table. Hosted Zone additional information input fields
  4. Check the generation history and click the Generate button.

    • After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Hosted Zone list page.

Check Hosted Zone details

The Hosted Zone service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. Hosted Zone Details page consists of Details, Records, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed information about the Hosted Zone, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > DNS menu, click it. Then go to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
    • Hosted Zone Details page displays the Hosted Zone’s status information and details, and consists of Details, Records, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Service statusHosted Zone status
      • Creating: In progress
      • Active: Running
      • Editing: Changing settings
      • Deleting: Terminating
      • Error: An error occurred
      Delete Hosted ZoneButton to delete the Hosted Zone
      Table. Hosted Zone status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the Hosted Zone List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
EditorUser who edited the service information
Modification date and timeDate and time the service information was modified
Hosted Zone nameHosted Zone domain name
Usage classificationDisplay selected usage
Private DNS nameSelected Private DNS name
descriptionHosted Zone description
  • Edit Click the icon to edit the description
Table. Hosted Zone detailed information tab items

record

On the Hosted Zone List page, you can view the registered record information and add, modify, or delete records. A record is an item that configures communication with the DNS server, informing the server of the IP address associated with the domain and how to handle requests sent to the domain.

CategoryDetailed description
Advanced SearchRecord detailed search settings button
Add recordAdd Record button
NameRegistered record name
typeRecord Types
  • A: Record that assigns an IPv4 address to a domain name
  • AAAA: Record that assigns an IPv6 address to a domain name
  • SPF: Record that registers the sending server’s IP to prevent spam email
  • CNAME: Record that specifies an alias for a domain name
  • MX: Record that designates the mail server for a domain
  • TXT: Record that stores textual information (description) about a domain
  • NS: Name server record responsible for the domain (automatically generated)
  • SOA: Start of Authority record that defines the domain’s initial information (authority start point) (automatically generated)
valueIP address of the record
TTLTime for DNS response servers to temporarily store records
Auto-generatedIndicate whether automatically generated
statusService status display
More menuRecord editing and deletion are possible
Table. Items in the Records tab of the Hosted Zone

tag

Hosted Zone List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Hosted Zone Tag Tab Items

Job History

On the Hosted Zone List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • You can view operation details, operation time, resource type, resource name, operation result, and operator information
  • Operation History List When you click the corresponding resource in the list, the Operation History Details popup opens
Table. Hosted Zone operation history tab items

Managing records of a Hosted Zone

You can add or delete records in the Hosted Zone service.

Add Record

To add a record to a Hosted Zone, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
  4. On the Hosted Zone Details page, click the Record tab. You will be taken to the Record tab page.
  5. Record tab page, click the Add Record button. The Add Record window opens.
  6. In the Add Record window, select the Type, Name, Value, and TTL fields, then click Confirm. A notification dialog will appear.
    CategoryDetailed description
    AEnter an IP address in IPv4 format
    • Click the Add button to add an IP address, up to 8 can be registered
    AAAAEnter an IPv6-formatted IP address
    • Click the Add button to add an IP address, up to 8 can be registered
    SPFEnter the IP of the server that sent the spam email
    • If registering multiple servers, enter in the format v=spf1 ip4:211.214.160.28 ip4:211.214.16.29 ~all
    CNAMEEnter a record alias in domain name format
    • Registration is not possible if entered the same as a value of a different record type
    MXEnter the priority and mail server address
    • Click the Add button to add a server address, up to 8 can be registered
    • When entering priority, input a value within the range 0 - 65,535; the smaller the value, the higher the priority
    TXTEnter text
    • Enter within 250 characters
    Table. Detailed items by record type
  7. Click Confirm in the notification dialog.
  8. Check that the added item appears in the record list.

Modify Record

Caution
Records created by the system or records in an Error state cannot be edited.

To modify a Hosted Zone’s records, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
  4. On the Hosted Zone Details page, click the Record tab. You will be taken to the Record tab page.
  5. On the Record tab page, click the list’s More menu and select Edit. The Record Edit window opens.
  6. In the record edit window, modify the desired fields and click OK.
  7. Click OK in the notification dialog.

Delete Record

Caution
Records created by the system cannot be deleted.

To delete a record in a Hosted Zone, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource to view its details. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
  4. On the Hosted Zone Details page, click the Record tab. You will be taken to the Record tab page.
  5. Record tab page, click the More menu of the list and click Delete. A confirmation alert opens.
  6. Click Confirm in the alert dialog.

Terminate Hosted Zone

You can request cancellation of the Hosted Zone service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Caution
If a record is registered in the Hosted Zone service, you cannot cancel it. To cancel the service, first delete the registered record.

To request termination of the Hosted Zone service, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
  3. On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
  4. On the Hosted Zone Details page, click the Hosted Zone Delete button.
  5. After the termination is complete, check the service termination status in the Hosted Zone list.

4.2.3 - Public Domain Name

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Public Domain Name service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Public Domain Name

You can create and use the Public Domain Name service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To request the creation of a Public Domain Name service, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > DNS Click the menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
  2. Click the Public Domain Name Create button in the dropdown of the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Create page.
  3. On the Public Domain Name creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Whether required
      Detailed description
      Domain name to registerRequiredEnter the Public Domain Name to use
      • Enter using lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens (-), within 2 to 63 characters
      • When applying for a new domain, click the Check Availability button to verify duplication
      Purchase periodRequiredAutomatically selected as 1 year
      Automatic extensionRequiredSet whether to automatically renew when the domain usage period expires
      • Use selected, enter detailed information
      • Registrant Name (Business Name): Enter the registrant name or business name within 30 characters
      • Registrant Email: Enter the registrant’s email address
      • Registrant Address: Enter the registrant’s company address, click the Find Postal Code button to search and then enter the address
      • Phone Number: Enter the registrant’s phone number
      Table. Public Domain Name Service Information Input Items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      ExplanationSelectEnter additional information and description for the Public Domain Name
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Public Domain Name additional information input fields
  4. Check the creation history and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Public Domain Name list page.
Caution
The domain auto-renewal feature can be changed up to one week before the domain’s expiration date. If the auto-renewal feature is not used, the domain’s information will be deleted on the expiration date.

Check detailed information of Public Domain Name

The Public Domain Name service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. The Public Domain Name Details page consists of Details, Registration Info, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed information about the Public Domain Name, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > DNS menu, click it. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. Click the resource on the Public Domain Name List page to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
    • Public Domain Name Details page displays the status information and detailed information of the Public Domain Name, and consists of the Details, Registration Information, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Service statusPublic Domain Name status
      • Creating: In progress
      • Active: Running
      • Editing: Settings being changed
      • Registered: Renewal registration
      • Transfer Requested: Domain transfer request completed
      • Expired: Usage period expired
      Domain transfer between accountsDomain transfer request button between accounts
      • Cancel Transfer Request: Allows canceling a domain transfer request after the request is completed
      • Approve Transfer Request: Allows approving a transfer request when a domain transfer request is received
      • Reject Transfer Request: Allows rejecting a transfer request when a domain transfer request is received
      Table. Public Domain Name status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the Public Domain Name List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
EditorUser who edited the service information
Modification date and timeDate and time the service information was modified
domain namePublic Domain Name domain name
Registration datePublic Domain Name domain registration date
Purpose classificationDisplay selected usage
Expiration datePublic Domain Name Domain Usage Expiration Date
Automatic extensionDisplay whether the auto-renewal feature is enabled
  • Click the Edit icon to change the setting
descriptionPublic Domain Name description
  • Edit Click the icon to edit the description
Table. Public Domain Name detailed information items

Registration Information

On the Public Domain Name List page, you can view and edit domain registration information.

CategoryDetailed description
Registrant name (business name)The registrant’s name or business name entered when applying for the service
Registrant emailThe email address of the registrant entered when applying for the service
Registrant addressThe registered company’s address entered when applying for the service
phone numberRegistrant’s phone number entered during service application
Table. Public Domain Name registration information tab items

tag

On the Public Domain Name List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Public Domain Name tag tab item

Job History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Public Domain Name List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • You can view the work details, work timestamp, resource type, resource name, work result, and operator information
  • Work History List When you click the corresponding resource in the list, the Work History Details popup opens
Table. Public Domain Name Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Public Domain Request Transfer Between Accounts

You can transfer a registered Public Domain to a user of another account.

Reference
  • If the domain you want to migrate is being used as a Hosted Zone, you cannot request migration. Delete the existing Hosted Zone first, then request migration.
  • The domain you want to transfer must have auto-renewal set to unused to make a transfer request. After the domain transfer, you can enable auto-renewal in the account that received the transfer.
  • Domain transfer requests can be made only up to one month before the domain’s registration expiration date.

To transfer Public Domain information to another account user, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name list page.
  3. On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
  4. Public Domain Name Details on the page, click the Domain Transfer Between Accounts button. The Domain Transfer Between Accounts popup will open.
  5. Domain transfer between accounts In the popup window, enter the account ID to transfer to and click the Confirm button.
    • When the domain transfer request is completed, it changes to the Transfer requested status, and the applicant can click the Cancel transfer request button to cancel the transfer request.
    • After a domain transfer request, if a user from another account approves the transfer, the domain information is deleted from the requesting account.
    • If the user who received the prior request does not approve within 7 days of the approval request, the prior request will be automatically canceled.

Managing Public Domain Data Transfer Requests

If a user from another account transfers a Public Domain, you can approve or reject the request.

Approve Public Domain information transfer request

To approve a request to move to the Public Domain, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. Public Domain Name List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
  4. Public Domain Name Details on the page, click the Approve Previous Request button. In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button.

Public Domain Reject request to transfer information

To reject a request before the Public Domain, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. Public Domain Name List page: click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
  4. On the Public Domain Name Details page, click the Reject Previous Request button. In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button.

Modify registration information of Public Domain Name

You can modify the registration information of a Public Domain Name.

To edit the registration information of a Public Domain Name, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name List page.
  3. On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
  4. On the Public Domain Name Details page, click the Registration Information tab. You will be taken to the Registration Information tab page.
  5. Registration Information tab page, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Edit Registration Information page.
  6. Go to the Edit Registration Information page. Modify the desired items and click the Done button.

4.3 - Release Note

DNS

2026.03.19
FEATURE DNS feature improvement
  • You can view measurement values for the following five items in conjunction with Service Watch.
    • Number of server error responses (unit: seconds)
    • NXDOMAIN response count (unit: seconds)
    • Number of queries not responding within 1 second (unit: seconds)
    • Number of outgoing UDP queries (unit: seconds)
    • Number of UDP-based data request processing (unit: seconds)
2025.12.16
FEATURE Add functionality to transfer Public Domain Name between user accounts
  • Through the Samsung Cloud Platform, a registered Public Domain Name can be transferred to another user account within the allowed period.
2025.07.01
NEW Official release of DNS service version
  • We have officially launched a DNS service that can be used in private networks and internet environments. You can manage Private DNS and Private Hosted Zones for restricted networks, and apply for Public Domain Name registration and manage Public Hosted Zones for internet environments.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta version release
  • We have launched a beta DNS service that offers domain registration request and management capabilities based on user requests.

5 - VPN

5.1 - Overview

Service Overview

VPN(Virtual Private Network) is a service that connects the customer’s network to the Samsung Cloud Platform through an encrypted virtual private network.

Diagram
Figure. VPN diagram

Features

  • Rapid Service Delivery You can configure automated services through a web-based console, and after creating a service, you can use the VPN service immediately without any waiting time.

  • Thorough secure connection You can securely connect from a customer’s external network to the customer’s internal network built on the Samsung Cloud Platform via encrypted virtual tunneling using a performance‑ and reliability‑validated IPsec VPN.

  • Simple operating environment You can easily and quickly manage web-based deployment, capacity provisioning, and service updates without the need for a complex network environment setup.

  • Efficient Service Use You can bear costs only for the amount you use the service without any separate installation fees, enabling efficient cost management.

Provided features

VPN provides the following features.

  • Provide virtual tunneling encrypted with IPsec
    • Compatible VPN: Secui – Bluemax (TG360),Paloalto,Axgate,Cisco-router/ASA/Meraki, Checkpoint,AWS,Azure,Vmware NSX-T
  • Virtual Private Gateway creation
    • Create a Gateway to connect the customer’s network to a private network that cannot be accessed externally.
  • VPN Tunnel Creation
    • Select IPsec VPN Gateway (up to 5 VPN tunnels per VPN Gateway)
    • In an IPsec VPN Gateway redundancy configuration, the standby device automatically operates when a failure occurs on the active device.
안내

The system stays in a waiting state until the remote peer initiates a connection, and when the peer sends a connection request, it receives it from the waiting state and automatically establishes a tunnel. * Remote Peer VPN must be operated in Active mode.

Constraints

CategoryDefault quotaDetailed description
VPN Gateway3Up to 3 can be created per account
VPN Tunnel5Up to 5 can be created per VPN Gateway
Table. VPN Restrictions

Provision status by region

VPN is available in the following environments.

RegionProvision status
Korea West (kr-west1)Provide
Korea East (kr-east1)Provide
South Korea 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
South Korea 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Provide
Table: VPN availability by region

Preceding Service

Service CategoryserviceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. VPN Pre-service

5.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics

VPN sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at a 1‑minute interval.

Reference
For checking metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Metrics

The following are the basic metrics for the VPN namespace.

The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the key indicators selected from the basic indicators provided by VPN. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built for each service in ServiceWatch.

Each metric indicates, via the user guide, which statistical value is meaningful when viewing that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the values shown in bold are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, you can view key metrics using these primary statistical values.

Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunitmeaningful statistics
Network In Total Bytes _vpn_tunnelCumulative traffic volume heading from VPN → VPCBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out Total Bytes _vpn_tunnelCumulative traffic volume from VPC → VPNBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network In Total Bytes _vpn_tunnel_DeltaCumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from VPN → VPCBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Network Out Total Bytes _vpn_tunnel_DeltaCumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from VPC → VPNBytes
  • Total
  • Average
  • Maximum
  • Minimum
Table. VPN basic metrics

5.2 - How-to guides

Create VPN

You can create and use a VPN service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Caution
You can create up to three VPNs per account. If you exceed the creation limit, you cannot create a new VPN.

To create a VPN, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN button. You will be taken to the Create VPN page.

  3. On the VPN creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.

    • Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.

      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      VPN Gateway nameRequiredEnter VPN Gateway name
      • Enter using English letters and numbers, within 3 to 20 characters
      Connected VPC nameRequiredSelect the VPC connected to the VPN Gateway
      • Click + New to create a VPC and then select it
      Public IPRequiredSelect the IP for communicating with the remote site from the VPN Gateway.
      Table. VPN Service Information Input Items

    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.

      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      ExplanationSelectionUser additional description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values.
      Table. VPN service additional information input fields

  4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • After creation is complete, check the created resources on the VPN List page.

Check VPN detailed information

The VPN service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. VPN Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view detailed information about the VPN service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN List page.
  3. On the VPN List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the VPN Details page.
    • VPC Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.

Detailed Information

On the VPN List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Service statusCurrent status
  • Active: Operating normally
  • Creating: Creation in progress
  • Editing: Configuration in progress
  • Deleting: Deletion in progress
  • Error: Unable to determine current status
    • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
Service terminationCancel VPN service
Table. VPN status information and additional features
CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameVPN resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
constructorUser who created the service
Creation timestampService creation timestamp
EditorUser who modified the service
Modification date and timeDate and time the service information was modified
VPN Gateway nameVPN Gateway name
Connected VPC nameVPC name connected to VPN
Public IPIP information for communicating with remote sites from the VPN Gateway
ExplanationAdditional description written by the user
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
Table. VPN detailed information items

tag

On the VPN List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of tags
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. VPN tag tab items

Job History

On the VPN Details page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Check operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, and operator information
Table. VPN operation history tab detailed information items

Terminate VPN

You can terminate unused VPCs to reduce operating costs. However, terminating a service may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should thoroughly consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the termination.

Caution
  • If there are resources connected to a VPN, such as a VPN Tunnel, they cannot be terminated.
  • The VPN service cannot be canceled when its status is Creating or Editing.

To cancel the VPN, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. Go to the VPN Service Home page.
  2. From the Service Home page, click the VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN List page.
  3. On the VPN List page, select the resource to cancel. Navigate to the VPN Details page.
  4. On the VPN Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
  5. Once the termination is complete, check on the VPN List page whether the resource has been terminated.

5.2.1 - VPN Tunnel

Create VPN Tunnel

In the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, you can configure IPSec Tunning with remote sites in the VPN service.

안내

Samsung Cloud Platform VPN service operates in Passive Mode (Responder role).

  • Remote Peer VPN must be operated in Active mode.

To create a VPN Tunnel, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. 1. Navigate to the VPN Service Home page.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. 2. Navigate to the Create VPN Tunnel page.

  3. VPN Tunnel creation On the page, enter the information required to create the service, and select detailed options.

    • Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.

      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      VPN Tunnel nameRequiredEnter VPN Tunnel name
      • Enter using English letters and numbers, within 3 to 20 characters
      VPC nameRequiredSelect the VPN Gateway to connect
      VPC nameDefaultAutomatically input VPC information connected to the VPN Gateway
      Public IPDefaultAutomatic entry of IP information for communicating with remote sites from the VPN Gateway
      Peer VPN GW IPRequiredEnter the remote VPN IP information
      • Example: 192.168.10.0
      Romote Subnet(CIDR)RequiredEnter the subnet address of the remote site to connect
      • After entering the IP address, click the Add button, up to 10 can be added
      • Example: 20.0.0.0/24
      Pre-shared KeyRequiredEnter the shared key (PSK) to be used for IKE mutual authentication between VPN gateways
      • Enter within 8 - 64 characters
      • It is recommended to use a 32-character alphanumeric string
      ExplanationSelectionUser additional description
      Table. VPN Tunnel Service Information Input Items

    • Enter or select the required information in the Tunnel Settings area.

      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      IKE Settings > IKE VersionRequiredSelect IKE version
      IKE Settings > Algorithm SettingsRequiredSelect Encryption Algorithm and Digest Algorithm, then click the Add button.
      IKE Settings > Diffie-HellmanRequiredDiffie-Hellman group selection
      IKE Settings > SA LifetimeRequiredEnter VPN session (Security Association) validity period
      IPSec Settings > Algorithm SettingsRequiredSelect Encryption Algorithm and Digest Algorithm, then click the Add button.
      IPSec Settings > Perfect Forward Secrecy(PFS)RequiredSelect whether to use the PFS group
      IPSec Settings > Diffie-HellmanRequiredDiffie-Hellman group selection
      IPSec Settings > SA LifetimeRequiredVPN session (Security Association) valid time input
      Table. VPN Tunnel configuration items

    • Enter the required information in the DPD Additional Settings area.

      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      DPD additional settings > DPD probe intervalRequiredEnter the DPD inspection interval
      • Enter a value between 1 and 3,600 seconds
      Table. VPN Tunnel DPD Additional Configuration Input Items

    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.

      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, input or select Key, Value values
      Table. VPN Tunnel additional information input fields

  4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the VPN Tunnel list page.

Check VPN Tunnel detailed information

The VPN Tunnel service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. The VPN Tunnel Details page is composed of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.

To view detailed VPN information, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > VPN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPN’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. 2. Go to the VPN Tunnel List page.
  3. On the VPN Tunnel List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. VPN Tunnel Details page.
    • VPN Tunnel Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
CategoryDetailed description
StatusCurrent status
  • Active: Operating normally
  • Creating: Creating
  • Editing: Updating information
  • Deleting: Deleting
  • Error: Unable to determine current status
    • If it persists, contact the registered administrator
Delete VPN TunnelVPN Tunnel Delete button
Table. VPN Tunnel status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the VPN Tunnel List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameVPN resource name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
EditorUser who edited the service information
Modification date and timeDate and time the service information was modified
VPN Tunnel nameVPN Tunnel name
VPN Gateway nameVPN Gateway name
Public IPPublic IP information
Peer VPN GW IPPeer VPN GW information
  • Click the Edit icon to edit
Remote Subnet (CIDR)Remote Sunet information
  • Edit click the icon to edit
Pre-shared KeyPre-shared Key information
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
Tunneling connection statusCurrent tunneling service connection status
ExplanationVPN Tunnel additional description
  • Click the Edit icon to modify
IKEEdit button can be clicked to bulk edit the configuration information
IKE VersionIKE Version information
Encryption Algorithm/Digest AlgorithmAlgorithm information
Diffie-HellmanDiffie-Hellman information
SA LifeTimeSA LifeTime information
IPSecClick the Edit button to bulk edit configuration information.
Encryption Algorithm/Digest AlgorithmAlgorithm information
Diffie-HellmanDiffie-Hellman information
SA LifeTimeSA LifeTime information
Perfect Forward Secrecy(PFS)PFS configuration information
DPDDPD probe interval information
  • Edit Click the icon to edit
Table: VPN Tunnel Detailed Information Items

Tag

VPN Tunnel list page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search the existing list of created Keys and Values and select
Table. VPN Tunnel tag tab items

Job History

VPN Tunnel List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Check operation date/time, resource name, operation details, operation result, and operator information
Table. VPN Tunnel operation history tab detailed information items

Delete VPN Tunnel

You can reduce operating costs by deleting unused VPC tunnels. However, deleting a Tunnel may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should proceed with the deletion only after fully considering the impact of service interruption.

To cancel the VPN, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. 1. Navigate to the VPN’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. 2. Navigate to the VPN Tunnel List page.
  3. On the VPN Tunnel List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the VPN Tunnel Details page.
  4. VPN Tunnel Delete button, click it.
  5. When the termination is complete, check on the VPN Tunnel List page whether the resource has been deleted.

5.3 - API Reference

API Reference

5.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

5.5 - Release Note

VPN

2025.10.23
FEATURE Change the number of remote subnets added to the VPN Tunnel
  • You can input up to 10 Romote Subnet (CIDR).
2024.02.27
NEW Official release of VPN service
  • A VPN service that connects the customer network to the Samsung Cloud Platform via an encrypted (IPSec) virtual private network has been launched.

6 - Firewall

6.1 - Overview

Service Overview

A firewall is a virtual logical firewall service that controls traffic occurring in the VPC and Load Balancer of Samsung Cloud Platform.

The resources that can be applied in the firewall are Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, and Load Balancer, and you can set rules for communication between the VPC and the Internet, and between the VPC and the customer network, enabling secure network management.

When a firewall is first created, it blocks all inbound and outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any Deny).

Users can specify an IP address, port, and protocol to create inbound/outbound rules, and only traffic permitted by the created rules can communicate.

Diagram
Figure. Firewall diagram

Component

The components that make up a firewall are as follows.

ComponentDetailed description
Applicable targetResources to which the firewall will be applied
  • Apply the firewall to Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, and Load Balancer
  • When creating the target resources, the firewall checks whether to use the firewall and is created together
Firewall sizeFirewall is offered in five sizes according to rule quota
  • Extra Small: 5
  • Small: 100
  • Medium: 200
  • Large: 500
  • Extra Large: 1,000
Firewall rule
  • When a firewall is first created, it blocks all inbound/outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any Deny)
  • Add inbound/outbound allow rules by configuring target address, protocol, and port
  • Provides a bulk rule creation feature through form filling
Table. Firewall Service Components

Constraints

The Firewall of Samsung Cloud Platform has a rule quota (limit) that can be created per size. When creating a Firewall, it is created by default as Extra Small, and you can change the Firewall size on the Firewall Details page of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

SizeRule quotaDetailed description
Extra Small5Maximum number of rules that can be created: 5
Small100 itemsMaximum number of rules that can be generated: 100
Medium200Maximum number of rules that can be generated: 200
Large500Maximum number of rules that can be generated: 500
Extra Large1,000 itemsMaximum number of rules that can be generated: 1,000
Table. Firewall constraints

Preceding Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating a Firewall service. Please refer to the user guide (reference link) provided below for details and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that quickly and securely connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform network.
NetworkingLoad BalancerA service that distributes traffic across multiple servers to maintain stable service.
Table. Firewall Preliminary Service

6.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Firewall service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Firewall

You can create and use the Firewall service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Information

The Firewall service is created only after it is enabled in the prerequisite Networking service. The enabled Firewall can be viewed in the Firewall list.

  • A firewall cannot be created independently, unlike other services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To configure the firewall, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Networking > Firewall click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Firewall.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the prerequisite service to create. 2. Navigate to the service creation page.

    • VPC Creation: Enable the Internet Gateway and the Transit Gateway Firewall of the VPC service.
      • When creating a VPC Internet Gateway service, set the Firewall Use item to Use. * For detailed information, please refer to Internet Gateway 생성하기.
      • Create the Transit Gateway service for the VPC and request the Uplink Firewall integration service. * For detailed instructions, please refer to Transit Gateway 생성하기.
    • Direct Connet creation: When creating a Direct Connet service, set the Firewall usage item to Enable. * For detailed instructions, please refer to Direct Connect 생성하기.
    • Load Balancer creation: When creating a Load Balancer service, set the Firewall usage option to Enabled. * For detailed instructions, see Load Balancer 생성하기.
  3. After the prerequisite service creation is complete, verify that the corresponding Firewall resource appears in the Firewall list.

Check firewall detailed information

The Firewall service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information in the resource management menu.

To view detailed information about the firewall, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Networking > Firewall Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of the Firewall.
  2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. 2. Navigate to the Firewall list page.
    • On the Firewall List page, you can view the information below.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Firewall nameFirewall pre-service type_Firewall automatically generated in the format
      Firewall classificationFirewall pre-service type (Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, Load Balancer)
      SizeUser-selected Firewall size
      VPC nameVPC name connected to the firewall
      Connection nameAutomatically generate in the format preceding service name_Firewall using Firewall
      Number of rulesNumber of rules used on this firewall
      UsageWhether the Firewall is used (enabled), not used (disabled)
      • If not used, the Any Allow rule is applied and no charges are incurred for the Firewall
      StatusFirewall status display
      • click the More button to set Enabled/Disabled
      Table. Firewall resource list items
  3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Firewall Details page.
    • Firewall Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Action History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Service statusFirewall 상태 표시
      • Creating: Creating
      • Active: Running/All firewalls operating normally
      • Editing: Editing
      • Deploying: Deployment completed
      • Deleting: Deleting
      • Error: Error occurred/Errors occurred on one or more firewalls
      Table. Firewall status information

Detailed Information

Firewall list page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource NameResource Name
Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
ModifierUser who edited the service information
Modification date and timeDate and time the service information was modified
Firewall nameAutomatically generated using the resource name_Firewall_connection name
Firewall IDService’s unique resource ID
Firewall classificationFirewall pre-service type (Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, Load Balancer)
SizeThe Firewall size selected by the user
  • Edit click the icon to change the settings
Firewall rule count/quotaThe rule quota and the number of rules currently in use for the firewall
VPC nameVPC name connected to the firewall
  • Click the VPC name to go to the detail page
VPC IDVPC ID connected to the Firewall
Connection nameAutomatically generated as {Firewall 선행 서비스명_Firewall}
  • Click the connection name to navigate to the detail page
Log saving statusFirewall log storage option
  • Enabled: Store logs
  • Disabled: Do not store logs
  • Edit icon can be clicked to change the setting
Table. Firewall detailed information

Rule

Firewall List page lets you view the rule list of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete rules.

CategoryDetailed description
Rule synchronization statusAvailability Zone Firewall rule synchronization status
  • In Sync: When the firewall rule synchronization status of all Availability Zones is normal
  • Syncing: Firewall rule synchronization in progress for the Availability Zone
  • Out of Sync: When the firewall rule synchronization of some Availability Zones fails or is inconsistent
  • Previous synchronization history: View detailed synchronization history of firewall rules
  • Excel downloadDownload the currently entered rule list as an Excel (*.xlsx) file
    Detailed SearchSearch for rules that match user-defined conditions
    • Support partial string match (LIKE) search
    Rule modificationEdit and delete rules displayed in the rule list
    • Click the button to go to the rule edit page
    Add ruleAdd new Firewall rule possible
    • Click the button to go to the rule addition page
    orderDisplay rule order, and apply top-down according to the rule order.
    Rule IDUnique ID value for the rule
    • Clicking the rule ID opens a popup with detailed rule information
    Origin addressThe origin address added to the rule
    Destination addressDestination address added to the rule, displayed as the IP address according to the entered rule
    serviceProtocol and destination port
    OperationTraffic Allow/Deny classification based on rules
    • Allow: Traffic is allowed when it matches the rule
    • Deny: Traffic is blocked when it matches the rule
    DirectionFirewall traffic direction criteria
    • Inbound: external → internal
    • Outbound: internal → external
    Activation statusIndicates whether the rule is active; if it is inactive, the rule does not operate.
    Table. Detailed information of firewall rule list

    tag

    On the Firewall List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Firewall tag tab items

    On the Firewall list page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • Operation date and time, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator information verification
    • Click the button to perform detailed search
    Table. Detailed information items for the Firewall operation history tab

    Firewall rule management

    You can add, modify, or delete firewall rules.

    Caution
    • You can add or modify rules only when the firewall status is Active and the rule synchronization status is In Sync.
    • If you lack permission to view the status in the preceding service, you cannot add a rule.
    참고
    • The firewall periodically caches user‑registered Domain rules and stores the IP information for a set period.
    • If the cached result of the registered domain rule does not match the user’s IP, communication may be restricted.

    Create rule

    In the Rules tab, you can directly enter and add Firewall rule information.

    Follow these steps to add a firewall rule.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of the Firewall.
    2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. 2. Navigate to the Firewall List page.
    3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to add a rule. 3. Go to the Firewall Details page.
    4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
    5. Click the Add Rule button on the Rules tab. 5. Navigate to the Add Rule page.
    6. Enter the required information on the Direct Input tab page.
    7. After reviewing the added rules, click the Complete button.
    Caution
    If you navigate to another page without clicking the Confirm button after entering content on the Add Rule page, the entered items will be reset, so be careful.
    CategoryRequired statusDetailed description
    Rule locationRequiredSpecify the location of the rule to be created
    Rule ID to copySelectionEnter the Firewall rule ID to copy and click the Search button to select
    Origin addressRequiredSource addresses to add to the rule
    • CIDR(IP/Subnet Mask) format, using commas (,), ranges (-) to input multiple addresses, up to a maximum of 128 at once
    Destination addressRequiredSelect the type of destination address to add to the rule
    • IP selection: You can input multiple addresses at once, up to a maximum of 128, using CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format with commas (,) and ranges (-)
    • Domain selection: You can input up to 128 full domain names in FQDN format at once using commas (,)
    • The type items vary depending on the selected destination address format
    typeRequiredSelect protocol type to apply the rule
    • Destination Port/Type selection: Select protocol type
    • Internet Protocol: Enter protocol number, up to 128 entries allowed
    • All: Destination port/Type and protocol are selected for the entire range, meaning all ports for all protocols
    type > protocolRequiredSelect detailed protocol for the type
    • Choose the desired protocol among TCP, UDP, and ICMP; input fields vary depending on the selected protocol
    • When ICMP is selected in the protocol, ICMP Type can be set
      • Select a commonly used Type, such as Echo, from the values defined for ICMP Type
      • Click the Add button to add an input value
    • When TCP/UDP is selected in the protocol, you can choose allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP, TELNET
      • When entering manually, you can input values from 1 to 65,535, and you can enter up to 128 entries at once using commas (,) or ranges (-)
      • Click the Add button to add an input value
    • If Internet Protocol is selected in the typeEnter a protocol number within 1 to 254
    OperationRequiredTraffic allow/block classification by rule
    • Allow: Allow traffic when it matches the rule
    • Deny: Block traffic when it matches the rule
    DirectionRequiredFirewall traffic direction criteria
    • Inbound: external → internal
    • Outbound: internal → external
    ExplanationSelectionAdditional description written by the user
    Added rules-Check list of entered rules
    • Move Up: Move the selected rule up
    • Move Down: Move the selected rule down
    • Delete: Delete the selected rule
    Table. Add Firewall Rule > Direct Input tab item

    Create rules in bulk

    To add multiple Firewall rules at once, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Firewall Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. 2. Go to the Firewall List page.
    3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to add a rule. 3. Go to the Firewall Details page.
    4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
    5. Click the Rule tab’s Add Rule button. 5. Add Rule go to the page.
    6. On the Add Rule page, click the Bulk Rule Input tab.
    7. Select Rule location. 7. If no location is selected, it is added after the last rule.
    8. From Select File, click the Download Form button. 8. The rule batch input Excel file will be downloaded.
    9. Enter the rule information into the batch rule input Excel file, then save it.
    10. From File Selection, click Attach File to attach the Excel file you created, and click Add.
      • You cannot upload the file if the attached Excel file format differs from the registration form or if the file is encrypted.
      • You can upload up to 100 batch registration rules at a time. * Upload is not possible when the maximum number of registered rules is exceeded.
      • If the configured maximum number of rules for the firewall size is exceeded, the file cannot be uploaded.
    11. Added rule Check that the rule you entered appears in the list and adjust its order.
    12. After reviewing the added rules, click the Complete button.

    Modify rules

    You can select a firewall rule to view and edit its information.

    To modify firewall rules, follow the steps below.

    1. All Services > Networking > Firewall Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of the Firewall.

    2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. 2. Go to the Firewall list page.

    3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to edit the rule. 3. Go to the Firewall Details page.

    4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.

    5. In the Rule tab, click the Edit Rule button. 5. Edit Rule Go to the page.

      • On the rule edit page, you can configure the items below.
        • Enable: Activates the selected rule.
        • Disable: Disables the selected rule. * Disabled rules are not applied to preceding services.
        • Delete: Deletes the selected rule. * When you click Delete, the changes will be shown with a Scheduled for Deletion status.
        • Cancel Deletion: If the rule is in a pending deletion state, you can cancel the rule deletion.
    6. Rule Edit page, click the Edit button for the item you want to modify. 6. Edit Rule The popup window opens.

    7. Edit Rule Enter the item you want to edit in the popup window and click the Confirm button.

      CategoryRequired statusDetailed description
      order-Order of rules
      • The order can be changed by clicking Move Up/Move Down in the added rules list
      Rule ID-Cannot be changed to a unique ID value for the rule
      Origin addressRequiredSource addresses registered in the rule
      • CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format, using commas (,) and ranges (-), can be entered up to 128 addresses at once for modification
      Destination addressRequiredDestination addresses to add to the rule
      • can be entered and modified at once using CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format, commas (,), and ranges (-) for up to 128 addresses
      typeRequiredSet the protocol type based on the selected destination address entry
      OperationRequiredChange the Allow/Deny traffic classification due to rules
      • Allow: Allow traffic when it matches the rule
      • Deny: Block traffic when it matches the rule
      DirectionRequiredAbility to change the direction of traffic for Firewall criteria registered in the rule
      • Inbound: external → internal
      • Outbound: internal → external
      Activation statusRequiredWhether the rule is active; if it is inactive, the rule does not function.
      Rule locationRequiredRule location setting
      ExplanationSelectionAdditional description written by the user
      Table. Detailed items for modifying firewall rules

    8. After confirming the revised rules, click the Complete button.

    Delete rule

    Caution
    The firewall can be deleted only when it is Active and the rule is in Active or Error state.

    To delete a firewall rule, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Firewall menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. 2. Go to the Firewall List page.
    3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to edit the rule. 3. Go to the Firewall Details page.
    4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
    5. On the Rule tab, click the Edit Rule button. 5. Go to the Edit Rule page.
    6. On the Rule Edit page, select the rule to delete and click the Delete button.
      • Once the deletion request is completed, the item in the change log will be marked as Scheduled for Deletion.
      • Click Cancel Deletion to cancel the rule deletion.
    7. On the Edit Rule page, click the Complete button.

    Check rule synchronization history

    In the Rules tab, you can check the synchronization status of firewall rules and view detailed information.

    To view the synchronization history of firewall rules, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Firewall Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
    2. Click Firewall List on the Service Home page. 2. Go to the Firewall list page.
    3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource to add a rule. 3. Navigate to the Firewall Details page.
    4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
    5. In the Rules tab, click the Previous Sync History button. 5. Previous sync history popup window opens.
    6. Previous sync history In the popup, view the sync history and click the Confirm button.
      • Resynchronization: If one or more rule states are Partial Fail/Pending, re-run the synchronization.
      • Resynchronization cannot be performed when one or more items are in a Fail state.
      • Delete Fail request: If one or more rule statuses are Fail, you can delete the corresponding entries.
      • Status information: You can check the synchronization status of firewall rules.
        • Success: Rule synchronization succeeded on all devices
        • Partial Fail: Failed after attempting synchronization on one or more devices
        • Pending: Synchronization stopped after Partial Fail for all devices
        • Fail: All devices failed after attempting synchronization simultaneously

    Managing Firewall Resources

    You can modify the size of the firewall and change the log usage settings.

    Modify firewall size

    To modify the Firewall size, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Firewall.
    2. On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. 2. Go to the Firewall list page.
    3. Firewall List page, click the resource you want to edit. 3. Go to the Firewall Details page.
    4. On the Firewall Details page, click the size edit icon. 4. Go to the Resize popup.
    5. Resize In the popup window, select the size to modify, then click the Confirm button.
    Reference

    The firewall size is provided as the default Extra Small (rule quota 5), and you can change the firewall size to add firewall rules for use. For more details, see Firewall 제약 사항.

    • Firewall fees are charged based on the size of the Firewall service and traffic throughput.

    Using Log Storage

    Reference

    To store firewall logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs, and then configure that bucket in the log repository of Firewall Logging. Then, when you enable log storage in the Firewall details view, the Firewall logs are saved to an Object Storage bucket.

    • The log storage settings can be checked in Firewall Logging. * For detailed information, see Firewall Logging.
    • If you configure a log repository, Object Storage charges for log storage will be billed.

    To use Firewall log storage, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Firewall menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. 2. Go to the Firewall list page.
    3. On the Firewall List page, click the resource (Firewall) to enable log storage. 3. Go to the Firewall Details page.
    4. On the Firewall Details page, click the Edit icon for Log Save Setting. 4. Modify log save setting Navigate to the popup window.
    5. Modify Log Saving Option In the popup window, select Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
    주의
    If the log storage is not configured in Firewall Logging, you cannot set the log storage use.

    Disable Log Saving

    To set Firewall log storage to disabled, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. 2. Go to the Firewall List page.
    3. Firewall List page, click the resource (Firewall) for which you want to disable log storage. 3. Go to the Firewall Details page.
    4. Modify Log Save Setting Click the button. 4. Modify log save setting Navigate to the popup window.
    5. Modify Log Saving Option In the popup window, deselect Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
    6. Notification Check the message in the popup window and click the Confirm button.
    Caution
    If log storage is disabled, the service’s log retention will be halted, and tracking through log analysis will be impossible in the event of a security incident.

    Disable firewall

    The Firewall service cannot be deleted on its own. Deleting the preceding service will also delete the associated Firewall. When the preceding service is retained but the firewall is not used, you can set the firewall to an unused state on the firewall list page.

    Caution
    • If you change the firewall to an unused state, all previously registered rules will be deleted.
    • You cannot delete the preceding service if there are associated firewall rules. * Delete the firewall rules before deleting the preceding service.

    To disable the firewall, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. 2. Go to the Firewall list page.
    3. On the Firewall list page, click More > Unused for the resource you want to set as unused.
    4. After the usage status change is completed, check on the Firewall List page whether the resource’s usage status has been changed to unused.

    6.2.1 - Firewall Logging

    To store firewall logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for log storage, and then configure that bucket in the Firewall Logging log repository. Then, on the Firewall Details page, if you configure log storage, the Firewall logs are stored in the Object Storage bucket.

    To store firewall logs, configure according to the following steps.

    1. To store firewall logs, you can create a bucket in Object Storage or use an existing bucket. 1. To create a bucket, refer to Object Storage 생성하기.
    2. To configure the bucket for the Firewall Logging log repository, see Firewall Logging 로그 저장소 사용하기.
    3. To set the log storage option to Enabled in the Firewall detailed view, refer to Firewall 로그 저장 사용하기.

    Firewall Logging Enable Log Storage

    To set the Firewall’s log storage option to enabled, you must first configure the log repository in Firewall Logging.

    Reference
    Firewall Logging To configure a log repository, an Object Storage bucket for log storage is required. First, create a bucket in the Object Storage service. For more details, please refer to Object Storage 생성하기.

    To enable the log repository for Firewall Logging, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging Click the menu. 1. Go to the Firewall Logging List page.
    2. Firewall Logging List Click the drop-down list located at the top of the page and select Log storage bucket. 2. When you select a bucket, log storage path is displayed.
    3. After verifying the log storage bucket and log storage path, click the Apply button.
    Information
    After setting the log repository for Firewall Logging, you must set the log storage option to Enabled on the Firewall Details page for logging to start. For more details, please refer to Firewall 로그 저장 사용하기.

    Firewall Logging List Query

    When you set the Firewall Logging log storage bucket, you can view the Firewall Logging list.

    To view the Firewall Logging list, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging menu. 1. Go to the Firewall Logging List page.
    2. Firewall Logging List Check the resources in use and the log storage targets on the page.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Resource IDFirewall ID
      Save targetFirewall name
      Save registration date and timeFirewall log repository registration timestamp
      Table. Firewall Logging list items
    Reference
    After setting the log repository for Firewall Logging, you must set the log storage option to Enabled in the Firewall detail view for logging to start. For more details, refer to Firewall 로그 저장 사용하기.

    Firewall Logging Check detailed information

    Refer to the information below to view the detailed contents of the saved log.

    Stored log example: 2024-10-11T11:23:43,deny,0,17,4.1.1.100,45499,192.168.10.10,53

    CategoryExplanation
    2024-10-11T11:23:43Log date and time (2024-10-11, 11:23:43)
    denyAction (deny / accept)
    0Firewall Rule ID (Policy ID) that generated the log
    17IP Protocol ID
    • 1: ICMP
    • 6: TCP
    • 17: UDP
    4.1.1.100Source IP
    45499Origin Port
    192.168.10.10Destination IP
    53Destination Port
    Table. Log detailed information items

    Firewall Logging Set to Not Use Log Storage

    You can set the log storage in Firewall Logging to unused.

    To set the Firewall Logging log repository to unused, follow the steps below.

    1. All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Firewall Logging List page.
    2. On the Firewall Logging List page, click the top Log Storage Settings button. 2. Log Repository Settings Navigate to the popup window.
    3. Log storage settings popup window, select Log storage bucket as Not used, and click the Confirm button.
    Reference
    • The log storage settings can be changed when there is no log destination.
    • To change the log storage bucket, first change the setting to unused. * You can then reconfigure it to make changes.

    6.2.2 - Migration Rules

    Users can retrieve rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and apply them to the V2 service.

    Get firewall rules

    You can import rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and migrate them to the V2 service for use.

    Reference
    • When a firewall rule is transferred with the Migration feature, the Migration label is displayed before its name.
    • If the firewall rule description exceeds 100 characters, part of the description will be omitted and appended.
    • Rules that exceed the maximum quantity are not registered due to rule quantity limits based on the firewall size.

    To retrieve the Firewall rules of V1, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. 1. Navigate to the Firewall’s Service Home page.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Migration Rules menu. 2. Go to the Migration Rules page.

    3. Select the rule information to retrieve from the Migration Rules page and click Done.

      CategoryRequired statusDetailed description
      Original rule environmentRequiredSCP v1 (Vmware) Auto-select
      Applicable targetrequiredSelect the Firewall list within the account to apply the transferred rule
      Get rulesRequiredClick the File Attachment button to upload the decrypted Firewall rule file
      • After decrypting and saving the rule file extracted from the original environment, upload it
      List of Rules-View uploaded Firewall rule file details
      • Move up: Move the selected rule up in the list
      • Move down: Move the selected rule down in the list
      • Delete: Delete the selected rule
      Rule locationRequiredSet the position of the selected firewall rule
      • After the last rule: Move the selected rule after the last rule
      • Set before the specified rule / Set after the specified rule: Enter the rule ID to move the selected rule before/after the specified rule
      Table. Migration Rules detailed items

    4. After the firewall rule transfer request is completed, verify that the transfer item has been added to the firewall list.

    Modify the Firewall rule to be transferred

    You can edit each item when retrieving rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To modify the Firewall rules to be imported from V1, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Firewall menu, click it. 1. Go to the Service Home page of the Firewall.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Migration Rules menu. 2. Go to the Migration Rules page.

    3. Click Attach File in the Import Rules section to upload the firewall rule file.

    4. Click Edit on the rule item you want to modify in the rule list.

      CategoryRequired statusDetailed description
      Origin addressRequiredSource addresses to add to the rule
      • CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format, using commas (,), ranges (-) to input multiple addresses, up to a maximum of 128 at once
      Destination addressRequiredSelect the type of destination address to add to the rule
      • IP: In CIDR(IP/Subnet Mask) format, you can enter multiple addresses at once using commas(,) and range(-), up to a maximum of 128
      • Domain: In FQDN format, you can enter up to 128 full domain names at once using commas(,)
      • The type items vary depending on the selected destination address format
      typeRequiredSelect protocol type to apply the rule
      • Destination Port/Type Selection: Select protocol type
      • Internet Protocol: Enter protocol number, up to 128 entries allowed
      • All: Destination port/Type, protocol selected for the entire range, meaning all ports for all protocols
      Type > ProtocolEssentialSelect detailed protocol for the type
      • Choose the desired protocol among TCP, UDP, and ICMP; input fields vary depending on the selected protocol.
      • When ICMP is selected in the protocol, ICMP Type can be set.
        • Select a commonly used Type, such as Echo, from the values defined for ICMP Type.
        • Click the Add button to add the input value.
      • When TCP/UDP is selected in the protocol, you can choose allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP, TELNET.
        • When entering manually, you can input values from 1 to 65535, and you can enter up to 128 entries at once using commas (,) or ranges (-).
        • Click the Add button to add the input value.
      • If Internet Protocol is selected in the type Enter a protocol number within 1 to 254.
      OperationRequiredTraffic allow/deny classification based on rules
      • Allow: Allow traffic when it matches the rule
      • Deny: Block traffic when it matches the rule
      DirectionRequiredFirewall standard traffic direction
      • Inbound: external → internal
      • Outbound: internal → external
      Activation statusRequiredSet whether the rule is enabled
      • If disabled is selected, the rule does not operate
      ExplanationSelectionAdditional description written by the user
      Table. Detailed items of the Firewall rule edit window

    5. When the rule information edit is complete, click Confirm in the edit window.

    6. Check the modified rule information and click Done.

    6.3 - API Reference

    API Reference

    6.4 - CLI Reference

    CLI Reference

    6.5 - Release Note

    Firewall

    2026.05.21
    FEATURE Add firewall rule migration feature
    • For user convenience, a Migration Rules page has been added that allows you to import firewall rules created in the V1 environment and apply them to the V2 service.
    2026.03.19
    FEATURE Firewall rule management structure change
    • The method for entering and modifying/deleting firewall rules has been changed for user convenience. * When managing firewall rules, you can navigate to a separate page to perform the desired actions.
    2025.10.23
    FEATURE Add firewall rule input method
    • Add firewall rule input method
      • In the KR WEST and KR EAST regions, you can enter the destination address in FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) format.
    2025.07.01
    FEATURE Add firewall rule input method
    • Add firewall rule input method
      • A feature to input IP protocols has been added.
    2025.02.27
    FEATURE Add Load Balancer-Firewall feature
    • Add firewall functionality
      • You can use Firewall in the Load Balancer service.
    • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
      • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been reflected.
    2024.12.23
    FEATURE Add firewall log storage feature
    • A feature to save firewall logs has been added.
    • You can decide whether to store firewall logs and store the logs in Object Storage.
    2024.10.01
    NEW Firewall service official version release
    • Through the Firewall service, you can control inbound and outbound traffic in a VPC.
    2024.07.02
    NEW Beta version release
    • The Firewall service has been released.

    7 - Direct Connect

    7.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Samsung Cloud Platform provides a Direct Connect service that supports safe and fast connections between the customer’s network and the Samsung Cloud Platform environment.

    Through Direct Connect, you can allocate the internal private network range of an existing system to Samsung Cloud Platform resources for use. You can deploy backend systems such as application servers in a private network range without internet access, and enhance security by applying Samsung Cloud Platform network services such as Security Groups.

    Through Direct Connect, customers can seamlessly migrate their existing systems to Samsung Cloud Platform even if they hard-code IP addresses on devices or have architecture dependencies on IP.

    Diagram
    Figure. Direct Connect diagram

    Direct Connect Connection Creation

    Supports connecting by selecting a single VPC to connect to the customer network.
    Access can be blocked through the Direct Connect Firewall, and a Route configuration feature is provided to ensure a secure connection path.

    Constraints

    CategoryDefault quotaDetailed description
    Direct Connect5Based on the account, you can create one VPC per service zone (1:1).
    Table. Direct Connect constraints

    Preceding Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
    NetworkingSecurity GroupVirtual firewall that controls server traffic
    Table. Direct Connect pre-service

    7.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics

    Direct Connect sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.

    Reference
    To check metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

    Basic Metrics

    The following are the basic metrics for the Direct Connect namespace.

    The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the key indicators selected from the basic indicators provided by Direct Connect. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically generated for each service in ServiceWatch.

    Each metric indicates through the user guide which statistical value is meaningful when viewing that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the statistical values shown in bold text are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, primary metrics can be viewed using the primary statistical values.

    Indicator NameDetailed descriptionunitMeaningful statistics
    DirectConnect Network In BytesCumulative traffic volume toward VPC from Direct ConnectBytes
    • Total
    • Average
    • Maximum
    • Minimum
    DirectConnect Network Out BytesCumulative traffic volume from VPC to Direct ConnectBytes
    • Total
    • Average
    • Maximum
    • Minimum
    DirectConnect Network In Bytes_DeltaCumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from Direct Connect → VPCBytes
    • Total
    • Average
    • Maximum
    • Minimum
    DirectConnect Network Out Bytes_DeltaCumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from VPC → Direct ConnectBytes
    • Total
    • Average
    • Maximum
    • Minimum
    Table. Direct Connect Basic Metrics

    7.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Direct Connect service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Direct Connect

    You can create and use the Direct Connect service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To create a Direct Connect, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Direct Connect.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Direct Connect button. 2. Navigate to the Create Direct Connect page.

      • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        Direct Connect nameRequiredA name for Direct Connect that is easily identifiable
        • Enter using English letters (uppercase and lowercase) and numbers, within 3 to 20 characters
        Use UplinkRequiredBandwidth of the communication port for remote communication
        • Port capacity can be selected from 1G / 10G /20G / 40G
        • The selected port capacity cannot be changed after creation
        VPC nameRequiredSelect a VPC for communicating with the remote site
        • AZ information can be checked in the VPC list; VPCs already in use cannot be selected
        • If the selected VPC is Multi-AZ, choose a connection center; selecting an Active connection center automatically assigns a Standby connection center
        ExplanationSelectionEnter description for Direct Connect
        Use firewallSelectionSelect whether to use Direct Connect Firewall
        Whether to store firewall logsSelectionFirewall log saving option
        • Select whether to save Firewall logs
        Table. Direct Connect service information input items
      • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        tagSelectionAdd Tag
        • Up to 50 per resource can be added
        • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
        Table. Direct Connect additional information input fields
    3. Summary Review the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, then click the Create button.

      • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Direct Connect list page.

    Direct Connect Check detailed information

    The Direct Connect service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information in the Resource Management menu. The Direct Connect Details page consists of the Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.

    To view the detailed information of Direct Connect, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Direct Connect Click the menu. 1. Navigate to Direct Connect’s Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. 2. Go to the Direct Connect List page.
    3. On the Direct Connect List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Direct Connect Details page.
      • Direct Connect Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        statusCurrent status
        • Active: Operating normally
        • Deleting: Deletion in progress
        • Creating: Creation in progress
        • Error: Unable to determine current status
          • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
        Service cancellationButton to cancel the service
        • Terminate Direct Connect when there is no connected service
        • When you cancel a service, the running service may be stopped immediately, so proceed with the cancellation only after fully considering the impact of service interruption
        Table. Direct Connect status information and additional features

    Detailed Information

    On the Direct Connect List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

    CategoryDetailed description
    serviceService name
    Resource TypeDirect Connect resource type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    • In Direct Connect, it means Direct Connect SRN
    Resource nameDirect Connect resource name
    Resource IDUnique resource ID in Direct Connect
    ConstructorUser who created Direct Connect
    Creation timestampDirect Connect creation date and time information
    ModifierUser who edited Direct Connect information
    Modification date and timeDate and time the Direct Connect information was modified
    Direct Connect nameDirect Connect VPC resource name
    Direct Connect IDDirect Connect ID information
    Use UplinkPort range allocated for line connection
    Connection CenterMulti-AZ connection center information for the connected VPC
    Quick link to line application/cancellationLine connection service for the Samsung Cloud Platform local segment that connects to the customer’s line
    • Click Line Request/Termination Shortcut to go to the Support Center popup’s Service Request tab
    • The external line connection of Samsung Cloud Platform for customer integration is created through an SDS sales representative using the Network Line Service
    ExplanationDirect Connect resource description
    • Edit Click the icon to edit
    Connected VPC nameVPC name connected to Direct Connect
    • Click the name to go to the detail page
    Connected VPC IDVPC ID connected to Direct Connect
    Firewall nameFirewall name
    • Click the name to go to the detail page
    Use firewallFirewall usage
    Whether to store firewall logsWhether to enable firewall log storage
    Table. Direct Connect detailed information tab items

    rule

    You can register or modify communication rules between a remote location and the VPC.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Add ruleAdd Rule button
    Destination IPDestination IP information
    DestinationRouting direction
    Creation timestampCreation timestamp information
    statusConnection status
    • Active: Operating normally
    • Deleting: Deletion in progress
    • Creating: Creation in progress
    • Error: Unable to determine current status
      • If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
    DeleteRule Delete Button
    • If Direct Connect status is Active, rule deletion is possible only when the rule status is Active or Error
    Table. Direct Connect rule tab items

    Tag

    Direct Connect list page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Direct Connect tag tab item

    Job History

    Direct Connect list page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • Operation Date/Time, Resource Name, Operation Details, Operation Result, Operator Information
    Table. Direct Connect operation history tab detailed information items

    Add Direct Connect rule

    Caution
    You can add rules only when the Direct Connect status is Active.

    To add a Direct Connect rule, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Direct Connect Click the menu. 1. Go to Direct Connect’s Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. 2. Go to the Direct Connect List page.
    3. Direct Connect List On the page, click the resource to which you want to add a rule. 3. Navigate to the Direct Connect Details page of the resource.
    4. On the Direct Connect Details page, click the Rules tab.
    5. Click the Add Rule button on the Rules tab. 5. Add Rule Navigate to the popup window.
    6. Add Rule Enter the required information in the popup window, and click the Confirm button.
      CategoryDetailed description
      DestinationSelect between VPC and remote site according to the routing direction.
      Destination IPEnter destination IP range
      • Example: 192.168.25.0/24
      Table. Direct Connect rule additional input items

    Terminate Direct Connect

    You can cancel unused Direct Connect to reduce operating costs. However, if you terminate the service, the running service may be discontinued immediately, so you should proceed with the termination only after fully considering the impact of the service interruption.

    Caution
    Direct Connect cannot be terminated if there are resources connected.

    To cancel Direct Connect, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Direct Connect Click the menu. 1. Go to Direct Connect’s Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. 2. Go to the Direct Connect List page.
    3. On the Direct Connect List page, click the resource to cancel. 3. Go to the Direct Connect Details page of the resource.
    4. On the Direct Connect 상세 page, click the 서비스 해지 button.
    5. When termination is complete, verify on the Direct Connect List page that the resource has been terminated.

    7.3 - API Reference

    API Reference

    7.4 - CLI Reference

    CLI Reference

    7.5 - Release Note

    Direct Connect

    2025.02.27
    NEW Common functionality change
    • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
      • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been reflected.
    2024.10.01
    NEW Official release of Direct Connect service
    • We are launching the Direct Connect service that quickly and securely connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform network.

    8 - Cloud LAN-Data Center

    8.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    The Cloud LAN-Data Center can connect various networks such as servers, WAN Edge, and CX (Cloud eXchange) through a shared network infrastructure based on SDDC (Software-Defined Data Center) within a Samsung Cloud Platform region data center or a customer’s on-premises data center.

    Features

    Cloud LAN-Data Center provides the following features.

    • Rapid Network Access: When building a network environment in a Samsung Cloud Platform region or a customer’s on‑premises data center, a fast and secure, enterprise‑customized data center network can be configured using SDDC‑based infrastructure.
    • Cost Efficiency: By using logical configurations of virtualized infrastructure and optimized designs by experts, a customer-dedicated network with the same effect as a costly standalone physical network infrastructure can be built. The virtualized network environment reduces costs required for building physical infrastructure such as network equipment, data center floor space, and cabling.
    • Operational Continuity Maintenance: We provide a customized operational environment for each company, configured to preserve existing settings such as network security policies, IP schemes, and network protocols required in various on-premises environments.
    • Flexible network environment provision: Within an SDDC-based infrastructure, separating edge nodes (external network connection), service nodes (built-in equipment connection), and computing nodes (server connection) enables support for both hardware-type security and network solution appliances that require physical installation in the data center and virtualized equipment.
    Diagram
    Figure. Cloud LAN-Data Center diagram

    Provided features

    Cloud LAN - Data Center provides the following features.

    • Diverse Network Integration Virtualization: Provides virtualized resources for flexible N/W configurations and enables the creation of customer-dedicated networks using various Types of vDevice.
    • Network/Security Solution Integration: Provides virtualization solutions in NFV form, and can configure networks by integrating various types of appliances.

    Components

    Cloud LAN-Data Center is a service that provides connections between various networks through virtual network configurations within a data center. The components are as follows, and related services can be created.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Cloud LAN NetworkVirtual space for logically separated network configuration within the Cloud LAN‑Data Center infrastructure
    vRouterVirtual resources for connecting external lines (L2, L3)
    vSwitchVirtual resources for dedicated customer H/W connections and VLAN provisioning
    vFirewallVirtual firewall to protect infrastructure created within the Cloud LAN-Data Center
    vL4/L7Virtual L4/L7 switch for traffic load balancing within the Cloud LAN-Data Center
    vCoreVirtual resources for Full Mesh routing connections
    vCableVirtual Cable for routing connections between virtual resources
    InterfaceProvides a physical interface on the vDevice that can connect hardware equipment and circuits.
    Table. Cloud LAN-Data Center components

    Constraints

    When using the Cloud LAN-Data Center service, there are the following limitations.

    • Please inquire 1:1 about the available creation capacity per region.

    Provision status by region

    Cloud LAN-Data Center can be provided in the environments below.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Provide
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
    South Korea 3 (kr-south3)Not provided
    Table. Cloud LAN-Data Center regional offering status

    Pre-service

    Cloud LAN-Data Center has no prerequisite services.

    8.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Cloud LAN Network service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Cloud LAN Network

    You can create and use the Cloud LAN Network service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Reference
    You can apply for up to 5 Cloud LAN Networks.

    To request the creation of a Cloud LAN Network service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN Network Create button. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network Create page.
    3. On the Cloud LAN Network Creation page, enter the required information in the service information input area, and click the Complete button.
      • Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        Cloud LAN Network nameRequiredEnter the name of the Cloud LAN Network to create
        • Enter 3‑21 characters using English letters, numbers, and special characters
        Cloud LAN Network locationRequiredSelect Cloud LAN Network location
        descriptionSelectEnter additional information or description about the Cloud LAN Network service.
        Table. Cloud LAN Network service information input items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required?
      Detailed description
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
      Table. Cloud LAN Network additional information input fields
    1. Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Cloud LAN Network List page.

    Check detailed information of Cloud LAN Network

    The Cloud LAN Network service allows you to view and edit the list of connected resources and detailed information. Cloud LAN Network Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.

    To view detailed information about the Cloud LAN Network, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN Network menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network list page.
    3. On the Cloud LAN Network List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network Details page.
      • Cloud LAN Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Service statusService status display
        • Creating: Creating
        • Active: Running
        • Deleting: Deleting
        • Failed: Creation/Deletion failed
        Service terminationCancel Service button
        Table. Cloud LAN Network status information and additional functions

    Detailed Information

    Cloud LAN Network List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Serviceservice name
    Resource TypeResource Type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource NameResource Name
    Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
    constructorUser who created the service
    Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
    EditorUser who modified the service
    Modification date and timeDate and time the service was modified
    Service InformationCreated service details
    • Click the Edit icon in the description to edit
    Table. Cloud LAN Network detailed information tab items

    Connected resource

    On the Cloud LAN Network List page, you can view the vDevice information assigned to the selected resources.

    CategoryDetailed description
    vDevice ListDisplay vDevice information and status assigned to the created service
    Table. Cloud LAN Network Connected Resources Tab Detailed Information Items

    tag

    Cloud LAN Network List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Cloud LAN Network tag tab items

    Job History

    Cloud LAN Network List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check Operator Information
    Table. Cloud LAN Network Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

    Terminate Cloud LAN Network

    To cancel the Cloud LAN Network, follow these steps.

    Caution
    • If other resources are connected to the Cloud LAN Network, you cannot cancel the service. Delete all connected resources before canceling the service.
    • If the Cloud LAN Network service status is Creating or Deleting, the service cannot be terminated.
    • If you cancel the Cloud LAN Network service, it will be deleted immediately and cannot be recovered. Since canceling the service may cause the running service to stop immediately, please carefully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the cancellation.
    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN Network menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network list page.
    3. On the Cloud LAN Network List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network Detail page.
    4. On the Cloud LAN Network Details page, click the Service Termination button.
    5. When the termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted in the Cloud LAN Network list.

    8.2.1 - vDevice

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for the vDevice service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create vDevice

    You can create and use the vDevice service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Reference
    • To request a vDevice, a Cloud LAN Network must be created. * Check the Cloud LAN Network information before applying for a vDevice.
    • The detailed configuration of the generated vDevice uses a separate operating platform (NiO). * For NiO-related inquiries, please submit your request through Support Center > Contact and we will provide guidance.

    To request the creation of a vDevice service, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Create vDevice button. 2. Navigate to the vDevice Creation page.
    3. On the vDevice Creation page, enter the relevant information in the service information input area.
      • Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
        Category
        required status
        Detailed description
        Cloud LAN Network nameRequiredSelect the Cloud LAN Network to assign the vDevice
        vDevice TypeRequiredSelect the type of vDevice to create
        • vRouter: virtual resource for connecting external lines (L2, L3)
        • vSwitch: virtual resource for connecting customer-dedicated hardware and providing VLANs
        • vFirewall: virtual firewall for protecting infrastructure created within the Data Center
        • vCore: inter-resource connection service for Full-Mesh communication between virtual resources
        • vL4/L7: virtual L4/L7 switch for traffic load balancing within Cloud LAN-Data Center
        • vTAP : virtual resource for replicating traffic within Cloud LAN-Data Center and sending it to other devices
        vDevice Type > vRouterRequiredEnter the name to create when selecting vRouter
        • Enter using letters, numbers, and special characters, 3-21 characters long
        vDevice Type > vSwitchRequiredEnter the name to create when selecting a vSwitch
        • Use English letters, numbers, and special characters, 3-21 characters
        vDevice Type > vFirewallRequiredSelect creation information when choosing vFirewall
        • vFirewall: Enter the name to create
        • Vendor: Select vendor
        • Type: Choose the plan of the selected vendor
        • Redundancy: Choose whether to use redundancy, when Enabled is selected the cost for two firewalls is charged, and when not selected a single configuration is applied
        • Log storage option: Choose whether to use log storage, logs are stored on a single server and even if redundancy is selected only one server’s fee is charged
        • Contract period: Select contract period
        vDevice Type > vCoreRequiredEnter the name to create when selecting vCore
        • Enter using letters, numbers, and special characters, 3 to 21 characters
        vDevice Type > vL4/L7RequiredSelect creation information when choosing vL4/L7
        • vL4/L7 name: Enter the name to create
        • Unit: Enter the number of units to use (1-20)
        • Redundancy: Choose whether to use firewall redundancy
        • Contract period: Select the contract period
        vDevice Type > vTAPRequiredSelect creation information when choosing vTAP
        • vTAP name: Enter the name to create
        • Redundancy: Choose whether to use vTAP redundancy
        • Contract period: Select contract period
        Table. vDevice service information input items
        Reference

        When applying for a vFirewall, a Firewall Interface is created automatically. Detailed firewall information by vendor is as follows.

        vendorFirewall typeInterface countGenerated vFirewall Interface
        SECUI6 Gbs, 5,000 Rules3int / ext / dmz.1
        SECUI12 Gbs, 15,000 Rules3int / ext / dmz.1
        SECUI30 Gbs, 30,000 Rules4int / ext / dmz.1 / dmz.2
        SECUI60 Gbs, 100,000 Rules5int / ext / dmz.1 / dmz.2 / dmz.3
        Fortinet1 Gbs, 1,000 Rules3int / ext / dmz.1
        Table. Detailed Firewall information by vendor
      • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
        Category
        required status
        Detailed description
        TagSelectAdd Tag
        • Up to 50 can be added per resource
        • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
        Table. vDevice additional information entry fields
    4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Complete button.
      • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the vDevice List page.

    Check vDevice detailed information

    The vDevice service allows you to view and edit the list of connected resources and their detailed information. The vDevice Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.

    To view detailed information about the vDevice, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. 1. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. From the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vDevice menu. 2. Navigate to the vDevice List page.
    3. vDevice List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 4. Go to the vDevice Details page.
      • vDevice Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Service statusService status display
        • Creating: Creating
        • Active: Running
        • Deleting: Deleting
        • Failed: Creation/Deletion failed
        Delete vDeviceDelete Service button
        Table. vDevice status information and additional functions

    Detailed Information

    On the vDevice List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.

    CategoryDetailed description
    serviceService name
    Resource TypeResource Type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource nameResource Name
    Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
    ConstructorUser who created the service
    Creation date and timeService creation date and time
    EditorUser who modified the service
    Modification dateDate and time of service modification
    Service InformationCreated service details
    • The displayed items vary depending on the creation type
    Table. vDevice detailed information tab items

    Connected resource

    On the vDevice List page, you can view the resources allocated to the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    List of connected resourcesDisplay detailed information and status of resources allocated to the created service
    • The displayed items vary depending on the creation type
    Table. vDevice Connected Resources Tab Detailed Information Items

    Tag

    On the vDevice list page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. vDevice tag tab items

    Job History

    You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the vDevice list page.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • Operation Timestamp, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Operator Information
    Table. vDevice operation history tab detailed information items

    Terminate vDevice

    To terminate the vDevice, follow the steps below.

    Caution
    If other resources are connected to the vDevice, the service cannot be terminated. Delete all connected resources, then cancel the service.
    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. 1. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vDevice menu. 2. Navigate to the vDevice List page.
    3. On the vDevice List page, click the resource to view its detailed information. 4. Navigate to the vDevice Details page.
    4. On the vDevice Detail page, click the vDevice Delete button.
    5. After termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted from the vDevice list.

    8.2.2 - Interface

    Users can create the Interface service by entering its required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Interface

    You can create and use an Interface service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Reference
    • To request an Interface, a Cloud LAN Network and vDevice must be created. Before requesting an Interface, verify the Cloud LAN Network and vDevice information.
    • Interface is a function that assigns a physical port to a pre‑created vDevice. Interface can only be requested for vRouter and vSwitch.
    • When a vFirewall is created, interfaces are automatically generated to match the quantity specified for each spec.

    To request the creation of an Interface service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.

    2. From the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Create Interface button. You will be taken to the Create Interface page.

    3. On the Interface creation page, enter the relevant information in the service information input area.

      • Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        Cloud LAN Network nameRequiredSelect the Cloud LAN Network to assign to the Interface
        vDevice TypeRequiredSelect the type of vDevice to use
        • vRouter: virtual resource for connecting external lines (L2, L3)
        • vSwitch: virtual resource for connecting customer-dedicated hardware and providing VLANs
        vDevice Type DetailsRequiredSelect detailed information for vDevice type
        • vDevice Name: Select a vDevice
        • Interface Type: Select the type of Interface to use
        • Interface Name: Enter the Interface name
        • You can add up to 5 Interface entries; press the (+) button to add an entry, and the (x) button to delete an entry
        • Interface Redundancy: Set whether Interface redundancy is enabled; selecting redundancy incurs charges for two ports
        • Contract Period: Select the desired contract period
        Table. Interface service information input fields
      • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        TagSelectAdd Tag
        • Up to 50 can be added per resource
        • Add Tag button after clicking, input or select Key, Value values
        Table. Interface additional information input fields
    4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Complete button.

      • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Interface List page.

    Check interface detailed information

    The Interface service allows you to view and edit the list of connected resources and detailed information. Interface Details page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

    To view detailed information about the Interface, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. Go to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Interface menu. You will be taken to the Interface List page.
    3. Click the resource to view detailed information on the Interface List page. You will be taken to the Interface Details page.
      • Interface Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Service statusService status display
        • Creating: In progress
        • Active: Running
        • Deleting: In progress
        • Failed: Creation/Deletion failed
        Delete InterfaceDelete Service button
        Table. Interface status information and additional functions

    Detailed Information

    Interface list page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

    CategoryDetailed description
    serviceService name
    Resource TypeResource Type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource nameResource Name
    Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
    constructorUser who created the service
    Creation TimestampService creation timestamp
    EditorUser who modified the service
    Modification date and timeDate and time the service was modified
    vDevice TypevDevice Type information
    vDevice namevDevice name
    Interface TypeInterface Type information
    Port redundancyWhether to use port redundancy
    Contract periodSelected contract term
    Table. Interface detailed information tab items

    tag

    On the Interface list page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Interface tag tab items

    Job History

    On the Interface list page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check operator information
    Table. Interface work history tab detailed information items

    Terminate Interface

    To cancel the Interface, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Interface menu. You will be taken to the Interface List page.
    3. On the Interface List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Interface Details page.
    4. On the Interface Details page, click the Delete Interface button.
    5. When the termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted in the Interface list.

    8.2.3 - vCable

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for the vCable service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create vCable

    You can create and use the vCable service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Reference
    • To request a vCable, a Cloud LAN Network and a vDevice must be created. Before requesting a vCable, verify the Cloud LAN Network and vDevice information.
    • Only vCable configurations between vDevices created in the same Cloud LAN Network are possible.

    To request the creation of a vCable service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Create vCable button. You will be taken to the Create vCable page.
    3. On the vCable Creation page, enter the relevant information in the service information input area.
      • Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        Cloud LAN Network nameRequiredSelect the Cloud LAN Network to assign the vCable.
        vCable TypeRequiredSelect the type of vCable to create
        • Static: Provides a 1:1 connection between vDevices; when configuring vDevice A and vDevice B, select different virtual resources
        • vCore: Provides Multi Peering between vDevices, connecting multiple vDevices to enable connections between vDevices
        vCable Type > DetailsRequiredEnter detailed information according to vCable Type
        • vCable Name: Enter the name of the vCable to create
        • vDevice A: Select vDevice A
        • vDevice B: Select vDevice B
        • Select vDevice A and B sequentially; if a vFirewall Interface is selected from the A list, it will not appear in the B list
        • When the vCable Type is Static, vCore cannot be selected on vDevice A or vDevice B
        • When the vCable Type is vCore, vCore can be selected only on vDevice A
        • A vDevice can be connected to only one vCable
        • A vFirewall can connect a vCable using a vFirewall Interface
        Table. vCable Service Information Input Items
      • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
        Category
        required or not
        Detailed description
        tagSelectAdd Tag
        • Up to 50 can be added per resource
        • Add Tag After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
        Table. vCable additional information input fields
    4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Complete button.
      • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the vCable List page.

    Check vCable detailed information

    The vCable service allows you to view and edit the list of connected resources and detailed information. vCable Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

    To view detailed vCable information, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vCable menu. You will be taken to the vCable List page.
    3. Click the resource to view detailed information on the vCable List page. You will be taken to the vCable Detail page.
      • vCable Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Work History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Service statusService status display
        • Creating: Creating
        • Active: Running
        • Deleting: Deleting
        • Failed: Creation/Deletion failed
        Delete vCableDelete Service button
        Table. vCable status information and additional functions

    Detailed Information

    On the vCable List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

    CategoryDetailed description
    serviceService name
    Resource TypeResource Type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource nameResource name
    Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
    constructorUser who created the service
    Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
    EditorUser who modified the service
    Modification date and timeDate and time the service was modified
    vDevice TypevDevice Type categories
    vDevice A namevDevice A name
    vDevice B namevDevice B name
    Table. vCable detailed information tab items

    tag

    On the vCable List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. vCable tag tab items

    Job History

    You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the vCable List page.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check operator information
    Table. vCable operation history tab detailed information items

    Terminate vCable

    To cancel vCable, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vCable menu. You will be taken to the vCable List page.
    3. On the vCable List page, click the resource to view its details. You will be taken to the vCable Details page.
    4. On the vCable Details page, click the Delete vCable button.
    5. After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted from the vCable list.

    8.2.4 - vEdge

    Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the vEdge service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create vEdge

    You can request and use the vEdge service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a vEdge service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the vEdge Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.
    3. On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • In the task category, select vEdge creation.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: vEdge Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        serviceSelect the service category and service. If you click the vEdge service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Networking
        • Service: vEdge
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create vEdge: select when requesting a new service
        contentGuidance on the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a file you want to share via the repository, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only files with the following extensions are allowed: doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif
        Table. vEdge Service Creation Request Items
    4. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.
      • When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.

    Check vEdge application details

    You can view the vEdge service subscription and cancellation history in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To check the vEdge service application details, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. Go to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request menu. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Title of the service request you submitted. You will be taken to the Service Request Details page.
    4. On the Service Request Details page, view the request status and information.
    Information
    When a service request is received, the sales/operations staff verify the service application details and proceed with the vEdge service for the entered information.

    Terminate vEdge

    To request cancellation of the vEdge service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.

    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.

    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.

    4. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • Select vEdge termination in the task category.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: vEdge Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Networking
        • Service: vEdge
        Task classificationSelect the type of request you want to make
        • vEdge termination: select if you are terminating the service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each within 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
        Table. vEdge Service Termination Request Items
    5. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.

      • When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
      • Service termination takes 5–7 business days, including the cancellation request date.

    8.3 - Release Note

    Cloud LAN-Data Center

    2026.07.16
    FEATURE Enterprise offering new launch
    • We have launched the Cloud LAN-Data Center service in the Enterprise offering.
    2026.05.21
    FEATURE Change of provided services for a specific region, add vTAP option
    • The services offered in specific Samsung regions (kr-west1/kr-east1) have changed.
    • The vTAP option has been added to the Cloud LAN - Data Center service in Samsung’s offering.
    2025.07.01
    NEW Cloud LAN-Data Center Common Function Change
    • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Change
      • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been applied.
    2025.02.27
    NEW Cloud LAN-Data Center official service launch
    • We have launched the Cloud LAN‑Data Center service, which provides connections between various networks through virtual network configurations within the data center.

    9 - Cloud Secured SD-LAN

    9.1 - Overview

    서비스 개요 {#service}

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN은 사용자 인증 기반의 사업장 LAN 구축 및 운영 서비스입니다. SDN(Software Defined Network)과 통합 인증 솔루션을 기반으로 사업장 내 유·무선 네트워크를 통합 관리하며, 사용자 및 단말의 업무 특성에 따라 논리적으로 네트워크를 분리하여 운영할 수 있습니다. 또한 IP Mobility 기능을 제공하여 사용자가 사업장 내에서 위치를 이동하더라도 동일한 네트워크 환경을 유지할 수 있으며, 중앙 집중형 정책 관리와 운영 자동화를 통해 효율적인 네트워크 운영 환경을 제공합니다.

    구분옵션내용
    Network AuthenticationSaaS 형
    • SDN/인증용 인프라를 SaaS형으로 제공
    • 사용량 기반의 합리적인 비용으로, 소규모 고객에게 적합함
    Network Access서비스형사업장 LAN 구성을 위한 네트워크 장비와 운영 서비스 제공
    표. Cloud Secured SD-LAN 서비스 구분

    서비스 구성도 {#service-1}

    구성도
    그림. Cloud Secured SD-LAN 구성도

    제공 기능 {#feature}

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN는 다음과 같은 기능을 제공합니다.

    네트워크 인증: 사용자/단말 인증 기반 네트워크 접속 및 접근을 제어할 수 있습니다. 논리적 망분리: 업무/용도별 네트워크를 분리하고 보안 정책 적용할 수 있습니다. IP Mobility: 사용자의 위치가 변경되는 경우에도 동일한 네트워크 환경을 제공합니다. 정책 관리: 사용자 및 단말별 네트워크 및 보안 정책을 관리할 수 있습니다. 운영 자동화: 네트워크 설정 및 정책 배포를 자동화할 수 있습니다. 서비스 포털: 사용자 신청 및 관리자 운영 포털을 제공합니다. 네트워크 운영: 유/무선 네트워크 설계, 구축, 운영 및 관리를 할 수 있습니다.

    구성 요소 {#configuration}

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN는 다음 요소로 구성됩니다.

    Network Authentication: 사용자/단말 인증, 네트워크 망분리, 보안 정책 관리를 할 수 있습니다. SDN Controller: 네트워크 정책 관리, 설정 자동화 및 모니터링을 할 수 있습니다. 사용자 포털: 망 변경 신청, 인증 현황 조회 등 사용자 셀프서비스를 이용할 수 있는 포털을 제공합니다. 관리자 포털: 인증 현황 모니터링, 정책 관리, 운영 대시보드를 이용할 수 있는 포털을 제공합니다. 유/무선 네트워크: 사업장 내 유선 스위치, 무선 AP 등 네트워크 인프라를 제공합니다. 운영 서비스: 네트워크 설계, 구축, 운영 및 기술 지원 서비스를 제공합니다.

    제약 사항 {#constraints}

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN 서비스의 제약 사항은 다음과 같습니다.

    SaaS형 NW Authentication 사용을 위해 고객 사업장과 Samsung Cloud Platform 리전 간 네트워크 통신/연결이 필요합니다. Cloud Last Mile, 전용선, VPN 등 사용 사업장 내 장비 구성을 위해 서비스 생성 후, 서비스의 시작과 종료 시점은 담당 매니저와 협의 후 확정됩니다. 사용자별로 VM이 할당되며, 솔루션 설치를 위한 VM 사용비가 추가적으로 발생합니다. 사용자 인증 방식은 별도 협의가 필요합니다.

    선행 서비스 {#service-1} Cloud Secured SD-LAN은 선행 서비스가 없습니다.

    9.2 - How-to guides

    사용자는 Samsung Cloud Platform Console을 통해 Cloud Secured SD-LAN의 필수 정보를 입력하고, 상세 옵션을 선택하여 서비스를 생성할 수 있습니다.

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 생성하기 {#create}

    Samsung Cloud Platform Console에서 Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network를 생성하여 사용할 수 있습니다.

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network를 생성하려면 다음 절차를 따르세요.

    모든 서비스 > Networking > Cloud Secured SD-LAN 메뉴를 클릭하세요. Cloud Secured SD-LAN의 Service Home 페이지로 이동합니다. Service Home 페이지에서 Network 생성 버튼을 클릭하세요. Network 생성 페이지로 이동합니다. Network 생성 페이지에서 서비스 생성에 필요한 정보를 입력하고 상세 옵션을 선택하세요. 서비스 정보 입력 영역에서 필요한 정보를 입력 또는 선택하세요.

    구분
    필수 여부
    상세 설명
    Network명필수생성할 Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 이름 입력
    • 영문 대소문자, 숫자, 특수문자(-, _)를 사용하여 3 - 30자로 입력
    서비스 구분필수생성할 Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 서비스 종류 선택
    • NW Access: 사용할 네트워크 서비스 선택
    • NW Authentication: 네트워크 망분리를 위한 인증 방식 선택
    서비스 구분 > NW Access필수네트워크 서비스의 상세 항목 선택
    • 계약 기간: 네트워크 서비스 계약 기간 설정
    • Network Managed 서비스: 사용을 클릭해 Network Managed 서비스 사용 여부 선택
    서비스 구분 > NW Authentication필수인증 방식 서비스 타입 선택
    • SaaS: SaaS형 SDN/인증 인프라를 공용으로 사용하며, 인증 단말 수량별 월비용 청구
    설명선택50자 이내로 설명 입력
    표. Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 서비스 정보 입력 항목
    추가 정보 입력 영역에서 필요한 정보를 입력 또는 선택하세요.
    구분
    필수 여부
    상세 설명
    태그선택태그 추가
    • 자원당 최대 50개 태그 추가 가능
    표. Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 추가 정보 입력 항목
    서비스 정보를 확인하고, 생성 버튼을 클릭하세요. 생성 신청이 완료되면, 서비스 신청 상세 정보가 신청자 메일로 자동 발송됩니다. 생성이 완료되면, Network 목록 페이지에서 생성된 자원을 확인하세요.

    참고
    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 생성 신청이 완료되면 고객 사업장 최적화 설계를 위해 담당 매니저가 별도로 연락드립니다.

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 상세 정보 확인하기 {#check}

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 서비스는 Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 메뉴에서 전체 자원 목록과 상세 정보를 확인하고 수정할 수 있습니다. Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 상세 페이지는 상세 정보, 태그, 작업 이력 탭으로 구성되어 있습니다.

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network의 상세 정보를 확인하려면 다음 절차를 따르세요.

    모든 서비스 > Networking > Cloud Secured SD-LAN 메뉴를 클릭하세요. Cloud Secured SD-LAN의 Service Home 페이지로 이동합니다. Service Home 페이지에서 Network 메뉴를 클릭하세요. Network 목록 페이지로 이동합니다. Network 목록 페이지에서 상세 정보를 확인할 자원을 클릭하세요. Network 상세 페이지로 이동합니다. Network 상세 페이지에는 상태 정보 및 부가 기능 정보가 표시되며, 상세 정보, 태그, 작업 이력 탭으로 구성됩니다.

    구분상세 설명
    상태서비스 현재 상태
    • Creating: 서비스 신청 진행 중/계약 완료
    • Active: 서비스 시작/정상 동작 중
    • Request: 서비스 생성 요청
    • Deleted: 서비스 해지 완료
    • Deleting: 서비스 해지 요청 중
    • Canceled: 서비스 신규 생성 취소
    서비스 해지서비스 해지 버튼
    • Active 상태인 경우에만 Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network를 해지할 수 있음
    표. Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 상태 정보 및 부가 기능 항목

    상세 정보 {#information}

    상세 정보 탭에서는 선택한 Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network의 상세 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다.

    구분상세 설명
    서비스서비스명
    자원 유형자원 유형명
    SRNSamsung Cloud Platform에서의 자원 고유 ID
    자원명자원 이름
    자원 ID서비스에서의 자원 고유 ID
    생성자서비스 생성 요청 사용자
    생성 일시서비스 생성 일시
    서비스 상세Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 서비스 상세 정보
    • 선택한 서비스 구분 항목에 따라 상세 정보 달라짐
    • 설명 수정 아이콘을 클릭하면 설명 수정 가능
    • NW Authentication > SaaS를 선택한 경우 테넌트 정보와 당월 사용 현황이 표시됨
      • 테넌트 정보에는 해당 자원과 연결된 CLAN 사업장 ID 표시, 인증 포털 또는 SDN 포털을 클릭하면 Manager Portal에서 자원 상세 정보 확인 가능
      • 당월 사용 현황에는 이번 달 사용한 인증 단말 수량 표시
    표. Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 상세 정보 탭 항목

    태그 {#tag}

    태그 탭에서 선택한 자원의 태그 정보를 확인하고, 추가하거나 변경 또는 삭제할 수 있습니다.

    구분상세 설명
    태그 목록태그 목록
    • 태그의 Key, Value 정보 확인 가능
    • 태그는 자원 당 최대 50개까지 추가 가능
    • 태그 입력 시 기존에 생성된 Key와 Value 목록을 검색하여 선택
    표. Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 태그 탭 항목

    작업 이력 {#job}

    작업 이력 탭에서는 선택한 자원의 작업 이력을 확인할 수 있습니다.

    구분상세 설명
    작업 이력 목록자원 변경 이력
    • 작업 일시, 자원 유형, 자원명, 작업 내역, 작업 결과, 작업자명, 경로 정보 확인이 가능
    • 상세 검색을 하려면 상세 검색 버튼을 클릭
    표. Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 작업 이력 탭 상세 정보 항목

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 해지하기 {#terminate}

    사용하지 않는 Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network를 해지하면 운영 비용을 절감할 수 있습니다.

    주의
    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 서비스 상태가 Active 상태인 경우에만 서비스 해지 버튼이 표시됩니다.

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network를 해지하려면 다음 절차를 따르세요.

    모든 서비스 > Networking > Cloud Secured SD-LAN 메뉴를 클릭하세요. Cloud Secured SD-LAN의 Service Home 페이지로 이동합니다. Service Home 페이지에서 Network 메뉴를 클릭하세요. Network 목록 페이지로 이동합니다. Network 목록 페이지에서 해지할 자원을 클릭하세요. Network 상세 페이지로 이동합니다. Network 상세 페이지에서 서비스 해지 버튼을 클릭하세요. 해지가 완료되면, Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 목록에서 자원 해지 여부를 확인하세요. 해지 신청이 완료되면, 서비스 해지 상세 정보가 신청자 메일로 자동 발송됩니다.

    참고
    Cloud Secured SD-LAN Network 해지 신청이 완료되면 해지 처리 진행을 위해 담당 매니저가 별도로 연락드립니다.

    9.3 - Release Note

    Cloud Secured SD-LAN {#cssd_lan}

    2026.07.16
    NEW Cloud Secured SD-LAN 서비스 출시
    고객 사업장 내 사용자/단말 인증 기반 망분리 네트워크 환경을 제공하는 Cloud Secured SD-LAN 서비스가 Enterprise 오퍼링에 출시되었습니다.

    10 - Cloud WAN

    10.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Cloud WAN is a service that provides network connectivity between Samsung Cloud Platform global regions and customer locations. This offering is based on network traffic usage and provides differentiated operational management services according to the selected service level.

    The Cloud WAN service consists of the customer virtual backbone Cloud WAN Network, the Segment that provides logical network segmentation by purpose, and the Attachment that connects Samsung Cloud Platform Compute resources or receives a dedicated line from the customer’s site and connects it to a Segment.

    For example, to configure a backbone network connection from a system in a Samsung Cloud Platform region to a customer’s overseas location, the following settings are required in the user console. First, create the customer’s virtual backbone Cloud WAN Network. Next, select the access location, service level, contract period, and other options to create a segment that fits the intended use. Then, by attaching the segment at the region or the customer’s location, the backbone network between the SCP region and the customer locations is connected, enabling communication between them.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Cloud WAN Diagram

    Provided features

    Cloud WAN provides the following features.

    • Rapid Backbone Network Configuration: Customers using Samsung Cloud Platform can select desired site locations, create a virtual global backbone network, and configure a fast and secure cloud network between Samsung Cloud Platform regions and customer sites, as well as among customer sites.
    • Providing Various Network Edge Connection Types: By offering various Edge types that can connect to Cloud WAN, Samsung Cloud Platform Compute resources can be conveniently connected via Transit Gateway, and customers’ on‑premise local lines can be connected via Site Connect.
    • Cost Optimization Through Multi-Path Selection Feature: Unlike traditional backbone network line services based on line bandwidth, we charge only for the actual usage in the desired segment, and provide a transmission path option (Gold/Silver) selection feature based on traffic characteristics, enabling line cost optimization.
    • Service Level-Based Operations Management: Customers can choose the utilization mode of the Cloud WAN backbone transport network, the provided features, monitoring, fault management, and technical support level, and receive differentiated network operations management services according to the selected service level.

    Component

    The Cloud WAN service provides a global customer virtual backbone network. The components are as follows, and users can create resources directly through the user Console.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Cloud WAN NetworkCustomer-specific virtual backbone network
    SegmentLogical virtual routing domains in Cloud WAN Network, categorized by usage
    • Access Location, service level, contract period, multiple path option selection
    Access LocationPhysical base location for constructing a Segment
    AttachmentConnect Samsung Cloud Platform or the customer’s dedicated line Edge resources
    Transit GatewayEdge connection type for connecting Samsung Cloud Platform Compute resources
    Site ConnectEdge connection type for connecting customer site dedicated line resources (CE equipment)
    CE equipmentNetwork equipment that receives the dedicated line at the customer’s site (Customer Edge)
    Segment SharingProvides routing exchange settings to enable mutual communication among resources connected to different segments.
    Table. Cloud WAN components

    Constraints

    The Cloud WAN service has the following limitations.

    • You can create one Cloud WAN Network per account.
    • You can create up to five Segments in a single Cloud WAN Network.
    • You can create up to 50 Attachments in a single Segment.
    • You can create up to 10 Segment Sharings for a single Segment.
    • Connections between Segment and Attachment are allowed only within the same project, through request and approval.
      • However, Segment Sharing can be linked across different projects through request and approval.

    Provision status by region

    The Cloud WAN service is available in the environments below.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West 1 (kr-west1)Provided
    Korea East 1 (kr-east1)Not provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
    Korea South 3(kr-south3)Not provided
    Table. Cloud WAN regional availability status

    Preliminary Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingTransit GatewayA service that securely and quickly connects Compute resources within the Samsung Cloud Platform to a Cloud WAN Segment.
    Table. Cloud WAN Pre‑Service

    10.1.1 - Monitoring Metrics

    Cloud Monitoring service termination notice

    According to Samsung Cloud Platform’s policy, the Cloud Monitoring service is scheduled to be discontinued in September 2026.
    Accordingly, after the September 2026 release, resource monitoring of the Samsung Cloud Platform via Cloud Monitoring will no longer be possible.

    With the new alternative service, you can continuously conduct resource monitoring by using ServiceWatch, released in October 2025.
    ServiceWatch provides more modern and powerful features, replacing Cloud Monitoring to deliver a smooth monitoring environment.

    Block Storage is planned to be integrated with ServiceWatch starting after the September 2026 release.
    Detailed information about ServiceWatch can be found in the ServiceWatch Overview.

    Cloud WAN monitoring metrics

    The table below shows the monitoring metrics for Cloud WAN that can be viewed in Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, see the Cloud Monitoring guide.

    Performance itemsDetailed descriptionunit
    Instance StatusAttachment connection statusstatus
    Network in bytesIn bytes (inbound traffic usage per interval)bytes
    Network In Error PacketsIn Error Packet count (number of received error packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network In Packets [Broadcast]In Broadcast Packet count (number of Broadcast packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network In Packets [Dropped]In Dropped Packet count (number of dropped packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network In Packets [Multicast]In Multicast Packet count (number of Multicast packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network In Packets [Unicast]In Unicast Packet count (number of Unicast packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network out bytesOut bytes(Outbound traffic usage per interval)bytes
    Network Out Error PacketsOut Error Packet count (number of transmission error packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network Out Packets [Broadcast]Out Broadcast Packet count (number of Broadcast packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network Out Packets [Dropped]Out Dropped Packet count (number of dropped packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network Out Packets [Multicast]Out Multicast Packet count (number of Multicast packets per cycle)Cnt
    Network Out Packets [Unicast]Out Unicast Packet count (Unicast packet count per cycle)Cnt
    Table. Cloud WAN basic monitoring metrics

    10.2 - How-to guides

    Users can enter the required Cloud WAN information and select detailed options to create a service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Cloud WAN Network

    You can create and use a Cloud WAN Network from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Caution
    Only one Cloud WAN Network can be requested per account.

    To create a Cloud WAN Network, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Cloud WAN Network button. 2. Navigate to the Cloud WAN Network Create page.
    3. On the Cloud WAN Network Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
      • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        Cloud WAN Network nameRequiredEnter the name of the Cloud WAN Network to create
        • Enter using English letters and numbers, 3~20 characters
        Table. Cloud WAN Network Service Information Input Items
      • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
        Category
        Required
        Detailed description
        ExplanationSelectionEnter resource description
        tagSelectionAdd tags
        • Maximum of 50 tags can be added per resource
        Table. Cloud WAN Network additional information input items
    4. In the summary panel, check the service information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
      • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Cloud WAN Network List page.

    Check detailed information of Cloud WAN Network

    The Cloud WAN Network service can be viewed and edited from the Cloud WAN Network menu, where you can see the full list of resources and detailed information. Cloud WAN Network Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

    To view detailed information about the Cloud WAN Network, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Cloud WAN Network menu. 2. Go to the Cloud WAN Network List page.
    3. Cloud WAN Network List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Cloud WAN Network Details page.
      • Cloud WAN Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        StatusService current status
        • Creating: Service request in progress
        • Active: Service operating normally
        • Deleting: Service termination request in progress
        • Failed: Service failed state
        • Error: Unable to verify service status
        Service cancellationService termination button
        • If there are no connected services, the Cloud WAN Network can be terminated
        Table. Cloud WAN Network status information and additional feature items

    Detailed Information

    Detailed Information tab lets you view the detailed information of the selected Cloud WAN Network.

    CategoryDetailed description
    ServiceService name
    Resource TypeResource Type (Cloud WAN Network)
    SRNResource unique ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource nameResource Name
    Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
    ConstructorUser requesting service creation
    Creation Date/TimeService creation timestamp
    ModifierUser requesting service modification
    Modification date and timeService modification date and time
    Cloud WAN Network nameCloud WAN Network name
    Segment countNumber of used segments
    ExplanationService description
    • Edit Click the icon to edit the description
    Table. Cloud WAN Network detailed information tab items

    Connected resource

    Connected Resources tab allows you to view Segment connection status information.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Segment nameSegment resource name
    Segment IDSegment ID information
    StatusService resource status information
    Table. Cloud WAN Network Connected Resources Tab Items

    Tag

    In the Tag tab, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Cloud WAN Network Tag tab items

    Job History

    Job History tab allows you to view the job history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • You can view the operation date and time, resource type, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator name, and path information
    • To perform an advanced search, click the Advanced Search button
    Table. Cloud WAN Network operation history tab detailed information items

    Terminate Cloud WAN Network

    Terminating an unused Cloud WAN Network can reduce operating costs.

    Caution
    • If there are resources connected to the Cloud WAN Network, you cannot cancel the service. * Delete the connected resources first, then terminate the service.
    • If the service status of Cloud WAN Network is Creating or Deleting, the service cannot be terminated.

    To cancel the Cloud WAN Network, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Cloud WAN Network menu. 2. Go to the Cloud WAN Network List page.
    3. On the Cloud WAN Network List page, click the resource to terminate. 3. Go to the Cloud WAN Network Details page.
    4. On the Cloud WAN Network Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
    5. After termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the Cloud WAN Network list.

    Create Segment

    You can create and use a Segment in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Caution
    You can request up to 5 Segments per Cloud WAN Network.

    To create a Segment, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.

    2. From the drop-down on the Service Home page, click the Create Segment button. 2. Go to the Create Segment page.

    3. On the Segment creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.

      • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
        Category
        Required
        Detailed description
        Cloud WAN Network nameEssentialSelect Cloud WAN Network
        • Click +Create New to create a Cloud WAN Network and then select
        Segment nameSelectionEnter segment name
        Access LocationEssentialSelect the location to connect the Segment
        • Only one Access Location can be selected
        • Details > Connected Resources tab, you can add Access Locations one by one
        • Access Locations can be added up to the number of Cloud WAN service deployment sites
        Service typeRequiredSelect Segment service type
        • Select usage region
        • Global is for connecting domestic and overseas regions
        • Select service level (PremiumPlusG)
        • PremiumPlusG provides advanced technical support services with a dedicated technical support manager
        • Contract term can be selected from None, 3 years, 5 years, or 7 years
        • Contract discount rate is automatically applied based on the contract term
        Multiple pathsSelectionClick Use to enable multi-path transmission
        • Default path: Gold (3-way structure, critical tasks)
        • Option path : Silver (2-way structure, normal)
        Table. Segment Service Information Input Items
      • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
        Category
        required status
        Detailed description
        ExplanationSelectionEnter description for Segment
        tagSelectionAdd tags
        • Maximum of 50 tags can be added per resource
        Table. Segment additional information input items
    4. In the summary panel, check the service information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.

      • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Segment List page.
    Caution

    After creating a Segment, set the following items in the Details > Connected Resources tab.

    • Connect the Attachment created in the same Account to the Segment.
    • To connect between different accounts, set up Segment Sharing.

    Check segment details

    In the Segment menu, you can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information for Segment. Segment Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Multi-Path, Tags, Activity History tabs.

    Follow these steps to view the detailed information of the Segment.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Go to the Segment List page.
    3. Segment List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
      • Segment Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Multi-Path, Tags, Activity History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        StatusCurrent service status
        • Creating: Service is being created
        • Active: Service is operating normally
        • Deleting: Service deletion requested
        • Failed: Service creation failed
        • Error: An unknown error occurred in the service
        Delete SegmentSegment Delete Button
        • If there are no connected services, the Segment can be deleted
        Table. Segment status information and additional feature items

    Detailed Information

    Detailed Information tab allows you to view the detailed information of the selected Segment.

    CategoryDetailed description
    ServiceService Name
    Resource TypeResource Type (Segment)
    SRNResource unique ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource NameResource Name
    Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
    ConstructorService creation request user
    Creation timestampService creation timestamp
    ModifierService modification request user
    Modification date and timeService modification date and time
    Segment nameSegment name
    Access Location countNumber of access locations (Access Location) connected to the segment
    Region classificationUsage region (global, domestic) information
    • Domestic service will be provided later
    Service LevelProvided service levels (PremiumPlusG, LiteG) information
    • LiteG will be offered in the future
    Contract periodService usage contract period
    • Discount rate applied by contract period
    Attachment countNumber of Attachments linked to Segment
    Multiple pathsWhether to use the transmission path option (Gold/Silver) used by Segment
    ExplanationDescription of the Segment
    • Edit Click the icon to edit the description
    Table. Segment detailed information tab items

    Connected resource

    In the Connected Resources tab, you can view the connection status information for Access Location, Segment Sharing, and Attachment.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Access LocationCheck the location information linked to the Segment
    • Click Add to add an Access Location entry
    • Click Delete to delete the selected Access Location entry
    • If an Attachment or multi-path rule is linked to the selected Access Location, it cannot be deleted; you must first delete the linked resources before deletion is possible
    • If only one Access Location is configured for the Segment, that entry cannot be deleted; at least one Access Location must be configured
    Segment SharingTo connect between different projects, you can request a Segment Sharing connection
    • Click Create Sharing to add a Segment sharing item
    • Sharing can only be connected between the same service levels
    • Click Approve in the list to approve the connection request
    • Click Delete to remove the selected item
    Attachment connectionYou can request to connect an Attachment created in the same project to a Segment
    • Click approval in the list to approve the connection request
    • In Samsung Cloud Platform, the Transit Gateway must be pre‑created in the Transit Gateway menu before attaching it (* Transit Gateway Attachment will be available after March 2027)
    Table. Segment linked resource tab item

    Multiple Paths

    Multi-Path tab allows you to add or delete optional path rules for multi-path.

    Adding a Multi-Path Rule

    To add a multi-path rule, follow the steps below.

    1. All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Segment List Go to the page.
    3. On the Segment List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
    4. On the Segment Details page, click the Multiple Paths tab.
    5. On the Multi-Path tab page, click the Add Rule button. 5. The add rule popup appears.
    6. Enter the detailed information in the popup window and click Confirm.
      Category
      whether required
      Detailed description
      Origin Access LocationEssentialSelect the source location information of the multi‑path rule
      Source IP rangeEssentialEnter the source IP range
      • When entering an IP address, register the IP range in CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24)
      Destination IP rangeEssentialEnter destination IP range
      • When entering an IP address, register the IP range in CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24)
      • Cannot set both source IP range and destination IP range to 0.0.0.0/0
      ProtocolSelectionSelect the protocol
      Port directionSelectionSelect the port direction of the chosen protocol
      Port numberSelectionIf TCP, UDP protocol is selected, enter the port number
      • Allowed range: 1 - 65535
      • Port numbers can be entered up to a maximum of 5, separated by commas (e.g., 80, 443)
      ExplanationSelectionEnter multiple path rule description
      Table. Input items for adding multiple path rules
    Caution
    • If you enter information identical to an already registered rule, you cannot register it as a new multi‑path rule.
    • You can request up to 20 multi‑path rules.

    Check Multi-Path Rules

    Follow these steps to verify the multi-path rule.

    1. All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Go to the Segment List page.
    3. On the Segment List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
    4. On the Segment Details page, click the Multiple Paths tab.
    5. View detailed information on the Multi-path tab page.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Origin Access LocationSource location information of the multi‑path rule
      Source IP rangeSource IP range
      Destination IP rangeDestination IP range
      ProtocolProtocol Information
      Port directionProtocol port direction
      Port numberPort numbers of TCP and UDP protocols
      ExplanationExplanation of multiple path rules
      Table. Multi-path rule detailed information items
    Reference

    Click the Detailed Search button on the right side of the rule list to set search filters and perform a search.

    • You can quickly view multiple rules by searching with your desired filter among Source Access Location, Source IP, Destination IP, and Description.

    Delete Multi-Path Rule

    To delete a multi-path rule, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Go to the Segment List page.
    3. Segment List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
    4. On the Segment Details page, click the Multiple Paths tab.
    5. On the Multiple Paths tab page, select the path to delete, then click the Delete button. 5. This rule will be deleted.

    Tag

    Tag tab allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of a tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering tags, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Segment tag tab item

    Job History

    Task History tab allows you to view the task history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • You can view the operation date and time, resource type, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator name, and path information
    • To perform an advanced search, click the Advanced Search button
    Table. Segment operation history tab detailed information items

    Delete Segment

    Deleting unused Segments can reduce operating costs.

    Caution
    • You cannot delete it if an Attachment is connected to the Segment, or if Segment sharing or multiple path rules exist. * Delete the connected resources first, then terminate the service.
    • If the service status of a Segment is Creating, Deleting, Inactive, or Failed, the service cannot be deleted.

    To delete a Segment, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Segment List Navigate to the page.
    3. On the Segment list page, click the resource to delete. 3. Navigate to the Segment Details page.
    4. On the Segment Details page, click the Segment Delete button.
    5. When deletion is complete, check the resource deletion status in the Segment list.

    Create Attachment

    You can create and use the Attachment service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Caution
    You can request up to 50 attachments per segment.

    To create an Attachment, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. Click the Create Attachment button in the drop-down of the Service Home page. 2. Create Attachment Navigate to the page.
    3. Attachment creation page: enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
      • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
        Category
        whether required
        Detailed description
        Cloud WAN Network nameEssentialSelect the Cloud WAN Network to request the Attachment
        • +Create New click to create a Cloud WAN Network and then select it
        Segment명

        | Selection | Select the Segment to attach the Attachment

        • +Create New. Click to create the Segment and then select
      • | | Access Location | Essential | | | Connection type | Essential | Site Connect Detailed connection information settings
        • Attachment name: Enter attachment name
        • ASN information: Enter ASN information within the range 1-65,534. Note that 65,001 cannot be used
      • Port capacity: Select port capacity
      • BGP Password: Enter the password to be used for BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) when configuring BGP routing with the customer’s Customer Edge equipment
      • When connecting Site Connect, additional work with the customer’s CE router and SR is performed, taking several days until final connection
      | | Connection type | Essential | Select an available Transit Gateway (available after March 2027)
      • If you select an Access Location with Multi-AZ enabled, only Transit Gateway can be set in the connection type
      • Only Transit Gateway items within the same project are displayed
      • TGW items that already have a TGW Peering connection or an Attachment connection are not shown in the list
      • When a TGW item is selected, the Attachment name is generated automatically
      |

      Table. Attachment service information input items
  • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
    Category
    whether required
    Detailed description
    ExplanationSelectionEnter description for Attachment
    tagSelectionAdd tags
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    Table. Attachment additional information input items
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Attachment List page.

    Check attachment detailed information

    In the Attachment menu, you can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information for Attachment. Attachment Detail page consists of Detail Information, Tag, Work History tabs.

    To view the detailed information of the Attachment, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Attachment menu. 2. Attachment list Go to the page.
    3. Attachment List On the page, click the resource to view its detailed information. 3. Go to the Attachment Details page.
      • Attachment Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        StatusCurrent service status
        • Creating: Creating service
        • Active: Service operating normally
        • Requesting: Service request in progress, Attachment request can be canceled
        • Deleting: Service deletion request in progress
        • Failed: Service creation failed
        • Error: An unknown error occurred in the service
        Delete AttachmentAttachment delete button
        • when in Requesting state Attachment request cancel button is displayed
        Table. Attachment status information and additional feature items

    Detailed Information

    Detailed Information tab allows you to view the detailed information of the selected Attachment.

    CategoryDetailed description
    ServiceService Name
    Resource TypeResource Type(Attachment)
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource NameResource Name
    Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
    ConstructorService creation request user
    Creation timestampService creation date and time
    ModifierUser requesting service modification
    Modification date and timeService modification date and time
    Attachment nameAttachment name
    Segment nameName of the attached Segment
    Access LocationAttachment Connection Point (Access Location)
    Connection typeAttachment connection type (Site Connect or Transit Gateway)
    ASN informationWhen Site Connect is selected, the AS Number
    • is set to a value within the range 1~65,534, and 65,001 is not allowed
    Port capacityPort capacity set when selecting Site Connect
    BGP PasswordWhen selecting Site Connect, the entered BGP password
    • View button click opens a popup where you can enter the Samsung Cloud Platform Console password and then verify the BGP password
    • Edit icon click allows password change, and after changing the BGP password also needs to be updated on connected devices
      • Edit icon is displayed only when the Attachment service is Active state
    ExplanationDescription of the attachment
    • Edit Click the icon to edit the description
    Table. Attachment detailed information tab items

    Tag

    In the Tag tab, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of a tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering tags, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Attachment tag tab item

    Job History

    Task History tab allows you to view the task history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource change history
    • You can view the operation date/time, resource type, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator name, and path information
    • To perform an advanced search, click the Advanced Search button
    Table. Attachment work history tab detailed information items

    Delete Attachment

    Deleting unused Attachment can reduce operating costs.

    To delete the Attachment, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Attachment menu. 2. Go to the Attachment list page.
    3. On the Attachment List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the Attachment Details page.
    4. On the Attachment Details page, click the Attachment Delete button.
    5. Once deletion is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted in the Attachment list.